1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
159 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
160 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
161 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
162 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
164 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
165 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
176 by the \SpecialChar LyX
181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
183 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
184 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
185 Documentation mailing list:
186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
188 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
200 \begin_inset Newline newline
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
208 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
210 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
214 \begin_inset Note Note
217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
218 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
219 \begin_inset Newline newline
224 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
232 \begin_layout Standard
233 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
234 LatexCommand tableofcontents
241 \begin_layout Chapter
245 \begin_layout Section
246 What is \SpecialChar LyX
250 \begin_layout Standard
252 is a document preparation system.
253 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
254 scripts, publishable books, business
255 letters and proposals,
256 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
260 It is unlike most other
261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
268 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
270 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
286 pt type, left justified, 5
287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
296 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
300 \begin_layout Standard
301 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
306 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
310 \begin_layout Standard
315 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
316 's philosophy: most importantly,
317 the format of all of the manuals.
318 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
319 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
320 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
323 \begin_layout Section
328 \begin_layout Standard
329 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
330 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
332 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
333 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
337 \begin_layout Standard
338 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
339 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
340 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
342 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
343 only a vertical scrollbar.
346 \begin_layout Standard
347 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
348 The first case is large images.
349 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
350 the image and use the option
361 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
364 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
367 \begin_layout Standard
368 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
369 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
377 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
384 \begin_layout Section
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
391 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
393 Just select the manual you want to read from the
400 \begin_layout Section
401 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
405 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
412 \begin_layout Standard
413 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
414 can be configured via the menu
416 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
420 \begin_inset Index idx
423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
430 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
432 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
433 packages are available.
434 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
436 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
437 was installed on your system,
438 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
443 \begin_inset space \space{}
446 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
447 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
449 To force \SpecialChar LyX
450 to re-inspect your system use
452 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
456 \begin_inset Index idx
459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
460 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
466 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
467 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
470 \begin_layout Section
473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
475 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
482 \begin_layout Standard
483 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
484 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
485 installed but you will not be
487 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
488 or print your documents
492 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
493 Some \SpecialChar LyX
494 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
503 which can produce PDFs and the like.
506 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
508 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
511 every \SpecialChar LyX
512 document can still be output as plain text
513 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
519 \begin_layout Standard
520 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
526 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
527 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
530 \begin_layout Standard
531 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
532 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
533 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
536 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
544 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
545 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
548 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
552 \begin_inset Index idx
555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
556 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
564 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
571 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
575 \begin_layout Chapter
576 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
580 \begin_layout Section
581 Basic File Operations
582 \begin_inset Index idx
585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
594 \begin_layout Standard
599 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
600 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
603 \begin_layout Itemize
625 \begin_layout Itemize
641 arg "buffer-new-template"
647 \begin_layout Itemize
669 \begin_layout Itemize
677 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
681 \begin_layout Itemize
683 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
695 \begin_layout Itemize
707 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
711 \begin_layout Itemize
713 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
721 \begin_layout Itemize
743 \begin_layout Itemize
755 arg "buffer-write-as"
759 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
763 \begin_layout Itemize
765 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
781 \begin_layout Itemize
795 \begin_layout Itemize
809 \begin_layout Standard
810 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
811 few minor differences.
814 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
825 command lists the available templates.
826 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
827 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
828 and possibly propose text fragments
830 for the document, features
831 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
834 you would otherwise need to
835 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
837 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
841 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
845 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
853 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
859 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
860 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
864 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
872 \begin_layout Standard
873 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
886 \begin_inset Quotes erd
890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
905 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
906 to open a file or create a new one, that big
907 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
911 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
915 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
926 \begin_layout Standard
948 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
950 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
953 people work on the same document at the same time.
957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
958 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
961 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
966 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
967 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
969 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
971 \begin_inset Flex Emph
974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
976 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
977 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
986 \begin_inset Flex Emph
989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
991 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
999 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1010 \begin_inset space ~
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1019 will reload the document from disk.
1020 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1021 and want to restore it to the last save
1022 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1029 \begin_inset space ~
1034 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1035 them as your changes.
1038 \begin_layout Section
1039 Basic Editing Features
1040 \begin_inset Index idx
1043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1052 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1059 \begin_layout Standard
1060 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1061 can perform cut and paste operations
1062 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1063 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1064 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1065 editing features and how to access
1067 We will start with cut and paste.
1070 \begin_layout Standard
1071 As you might expect, the
1075 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1076 various other editing features.
1077 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1081 \begin_layout Itemize
1087 \begin_inset Index idx
1090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1119 \begin_layout Itemize
1125 \begin_inset Index idx
1128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1157 \begin_layout Itemize
1163 \begin_inset Index idx
1166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1191 \begin_layout Itemize
1195 \begin_inset space ~
1201 \begin_layout Itemize
1205 \begin_inset space ~
1211 \begin_layout Itemize
1215 \begin_inset space ~
1219 \begin_inset space ~
1225 \begin_inset Index idx
1228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1237 \begin_inset Index idx
1240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1255 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1265 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1271 \begin_layout Standard
1272 The first three are self-explanatory.
1273 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1274 and other programs using
1295 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1296 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1301 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1302 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1303 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1304 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1305 into individual cells.
1309 \begin_inset space ~
1314 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1315 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1319 \begin_layout Standard
1323 \begin_inset space ~
1328 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1330 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1332 \begin_inset space ~
1339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1345 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1346 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1347 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1349 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1353 \begin_inset space \space{}
1356 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1357 text which is often meaningless.)
1360 \begin_layout Standard
1364 \begin_inset space ~
1367 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1369 \begin_inset space ~
1373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1377 \begin_inset space ~
1386 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1387 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1388 is inserted as one paragraph.
1389 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1393 \begin_inset space ~
1398 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1399 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1405 \begin_inset space ~
1408 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1414 \begin_inset space ~
1422 \begin_inset space ~
1425 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1428 paste from the primary selection.
1429 This is normally the currently selected text.
1432 \begin_layout Standard
1435 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1437 \begin_inset space ~
1441 \begin_inset space ~
1449 \begin_inset space ~
1453 \begin_inset space ~
1459 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1465 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1468 \begin_inset space ~
1477 \begin_inset space ~
1482 button to skip the curren
1483 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1487 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1494 \begin_inset space ~
1499 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1503 \begin_inset space ~
1508 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1510 If the toggle is set, searching for
1511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1519 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1522 will not match the word
1523 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1531 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1537 Match whole words only
1539 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1540 to only find complete words, e.
1541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1545 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1574 also offers an advanced
1577 \begin_inset space ~
1581 \begin_inset space ~
1586 feature that is described in section
1587 \begin_inset space ~
1591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1593 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1600 \begin_layout Standard
1601 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1602 \begin_inset space \space{}
1606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1614 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1616 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1621 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1628 \begin_layout Standard
1632 arg "inset-select-all"
1635 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1636 When the cursor is inside an inset
1639 arg "inset-select-all"
1642 selects the content of the inset.
1646 arg "inset-select-all"
1649 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1650 then to the whole document.
1654 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1657 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1661 \begin_layout Section
1663 \begin_inset Index idx
1666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1673 \begin_inset Index idx
1676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1685 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1692 \begin_layout Standard
1693 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1695 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1698 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1701 or the toolbar button
1708 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1710 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1713 or the toolbar button
1720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1727 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1728 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1731 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1734 \begin_layout Standard
1736 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1737 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1739 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1746 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1747 This is a consequence of the 100
1748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1751 step undo limit mentioned above.
1754 \begin_layout Standard
1763 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1765 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1769 \begin_layout Section
1771 \begin_inset Index idx
1774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1783 \begin_layout Standard
1784 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1787 \begin_layout Enumerate
1792 \begin_layout Itemize
1797 once anywhere in the edit window.
1798 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1802 \begin_layout Enumerate
1807 \begin_layout Itemize
1814 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1817 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1820 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1821 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1823 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
1824 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
1830 \begin_layout Itemize
1831 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1834 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1841 \begin_layout Enumerate
1842 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1846 \begin_layout Standard
1847 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1848 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1852 \begin_layout Section
1854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1856 name "sec:Navigating"
1861 \begin_inset Index idx
1864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1873 \begin_layout Standard
1875 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1878 \begin_layout Itemize
1883 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1884 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1887 \begin_layout Itemize
1888 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1890 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1892 \begin_inset space ~
1897 or by the toolbar button
1900 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1906 \begin_layout Itemize
1907 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1909 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1912 and use the same menu to return to them.
1913 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1916 \begin_layout Standard
1920 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1925 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1926 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1928 \begin_inset space ~
1933 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1934 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1935 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
1936 last editing position.
1939 \begin_layout Standard
1944 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1948 \begin_layout Subsection
1950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1952 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1957 \begin_inset Index idx
1960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1961 Navigating ! Outline
1967 \begin_inset Index idx
1970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1979 \begin_layout Standard
1980 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
1981 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
1982 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
1983 \begin_inset space ~
1987 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1989 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1993 ), notes, or citations (see section
1994 \begin_inset space ~
1998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2000 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2005 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2009 \begin_layout Standard
2010 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2011 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2012 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2013 dialog and to modify the citation.
2016 \begin_layout Standard
2021 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2022 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2024 Labels and References
2026 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2035 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2038 \begin_layout Standard
2039 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2040 control the display.
2045 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2046 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2051 option keeps it in the current view state.
2052 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2053 \begin_inset space ~
2056 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2057 \begin_inset space ~
2060 3, the subsections of sections
2061 \begin_inset space ~
2064 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2069 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2070 \begin_inset space ~
2074 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2084 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2087 \begin_layout Standard
2094 button refreshes the TOC (
2095 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2097 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2101 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2103 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2107 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2111 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2115 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2119 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2121 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2125 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2127 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2131 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2133 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2137 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2141 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2143 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2147 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2151 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2155 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2159 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2163 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2167 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2171 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2175 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2177 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2181 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2195 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2196 For example, you can move section
2197 \begin_inset space ~
2201 \begin_inset space ~
2204 2.4 or after section
2205 \begin_inset space ~
2210 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2223 (or the corresponding key bindings
2231 ) you can change the level of sections.
2232 You can make section
2233 \begin_inset space ~
2237 \begin_inset space ~
2241 \begin_inset space ~
2247 \begin_layout Standard
2248 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2249 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2252 \begin_layout Subsection
2253 Horizontal Scrolling
2254 \begin_inset Index idx
2257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2258 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2266 \begin_layout Standard
2268 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2270 \begin_inset space ~
2273 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2274 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2275 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2279 \begin_layout Standard
2280 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2284 \begin_layout Itemize
2286 is used on a small tablet computer
2289 \begin_layout Itemize
2290 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2302 \begin_inset space ~
2315 \begin_layout Itemize
2316 Math constructs with long command names
2319 \begin_layout Standard
2320 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2321 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2323 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2324 window so that table
2325 \begin_inset space ~
2329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2331 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2336 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2338 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2339 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2342 \begin_layout Standard
2343 \begin_inset Float table
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2351 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2356 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2360 Horizontal scrolling test.
2368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2370 \begin_inset Tabular
2371 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2372 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2373 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2374 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2375 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2417 \begin_layout Section
2418 Input/Word Completion
2419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2421 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2426 \begin_inset Index idx
2429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2436 \begin_inset Index idx
2439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2470 \begin_layout Standard
2472 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2474 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2475 is used to propose completions.
2478 \begin_layout Standard
2479 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2482 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2487 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2494 \begin_inset space ~
2498 \begin_inset space ~
2503 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2507 \begin_inset space ~
2512 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2513 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2517 \begin_inset space ~
2523 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2524 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2525 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2526 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2529 \begin_layout Standard
2531 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2532 completions available.
2537 key to accept a proposed completion.
2538 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2539 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2540 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2543 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2550 \begin_layout Standard
2551 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2552 ing options for text.
2554 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2556 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2558 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2561 he special math option
2565 enables characters to be composed.
2567 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2569 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2573 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2576 you want to insert the character
2577 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2581 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2584 input the characters
2585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2597 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2599 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2603 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2605 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2610 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2612 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2615 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2618 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2620 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2623 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2628 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2630 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2634 's installation folder.
2636 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2637 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2644 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2649 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2650 In the example above,
2655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2687 \begin_layout Section
2689 \begin_inset Index idx
2692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2699 \begin_inset Index idx
2702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2731 \begin_inset Index idx
2734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2765 \begin_layout Standard
2766 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2780 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2783 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2787 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2788 \begin_inset space ~
2792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2794 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2801 \begin_layout Standard
2805 \begin_inset space ~
2813 \begin_inset space ~
2834 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2838 \begin_layout Labeling
2839 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2843 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2844 LatexCommand nomenclature
2846 description "Tabulator key"
2853 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2855 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2856 \begin_inset space ~
2860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2862 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2869 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2873 , especially section
2874 \begin_inset space ~
2878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2880 reference "subsec:Lists"
2886 If you are still confused, look in the
2891 \begin_inset Newline newline
2899 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2900 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2904 \begin_layout Labeling
2905 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2909 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2910 LatexCommand nomenclature
2912 description "Escape key"
2920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2927 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2928 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2931 \begin_layout Labeling
2932 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2937 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2938 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2942 \begin_layout Standard
2943 There are three modifier keys:
2946 \begin_layout Labeling
2947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2965 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2966 LatexCommand nomenclature
2968 description "Control key"
2973 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
2974 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2978 \begin_layout Itemize
2987 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2990 \begin_layout Itemize
2999 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3002 \begin_layout Itemize
3011 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3015 \begin_layout Labeling
3016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3034 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3035 LatexCommand nomenclature
3037 description "Shift key"
3042 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3043 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3046 \begin_layout Labeling
3047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3061 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3065 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3066 LatexCommand nomenclature
3068 description "Alt or Meta key"
3073 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3074 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3075 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3081 \begin_inset Newline newline
3084 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3086 menu accelerator keys
3089 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3090 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3094 \begin_layout Standard
3095 For example, the sequence
3096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3102 \begin_inset space ~
3106 \begin_inset space ~
3112 \begin_inset space ~
3120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3128 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3133 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3139 \begin_inset space ~
3145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3155 \begin_layout Standard
3160 manual lists all other things bound to the
3168 \begin_layout Standard
3169 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3171 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3173 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3174 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3176 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3177 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3178 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3180 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3181 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3196 followed by a capital
3203 \begin_layout Chapter
3206 \begin_inset Index idx
3209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3219 \begin_layout Section
3221 \begin_inset Index idx
3224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 \begin_layout Subsection
3237 \begin_layout Standard
3238 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3239 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3240 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3241 numbering schemes, and so on.
3242 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3243 and format the title of your document differently.
3246 \begin_layout Standard
3251 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3252 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3253 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3254 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3255 picks one for you by default.
3256 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3259 \begin_layout Subsection
3261 \begin_inset Index idx
3264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3273 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3280 \begin_layout Standard
3281 You can select a class using the
3283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3284 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3288 \begin_inset Index idx
3291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3298 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3306 \begin_layout Standard
3307 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3312 \begin_layout Description
3313 Article for basic articles
3316 \begin_layout Description
3317 Report for basic reports
3320 \begin_layout Description
3321 Book for writing a book
3324 \begin_layout Description
3325 Letter for US-style letters
3328 \begin_layout Standard
3329 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3330 only uses if you have installed
3331 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3332 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3333 distributions will include
3335 Here are some of the classes.
3336 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3338 Special Document Classes
3347 \begin_layout Description
3348 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3351 \begin_layout Description
3352 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3356 \begin_layout Description
3357 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3361 \begin_layout Description
3362 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3363 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3364 There are three article layouts available.
3365 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3366 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3367 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3368 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3373 sequential numbering
3374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3377 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3378 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3379 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3380 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3383 \begin_layout Description
3384 Beamer Layout for presentations
3387 \begin_layout Description
3388 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3389 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3390 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3391 with \SpecialChar LyX
3395 \begin_layout Description
3396 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3399 \begin_layout Description
3401 \begin_inset space ~
3404 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3407 \begin_layout Description
3408 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3411 \begin_layout Description
3412 Foils Used to make transparencies
3415 \begin_layout Description
3416 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3417 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3418 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3419 with \SpecialChar LyX
3423 \begin_layout Description
3424 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3425 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3428 \begin_layout Description
3429 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3432 \begin_layout Description
3433 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3436 \begin_layout Description
3437 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3438 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3439 (Is used by this document.)
3442 \begin_layout Description
3443 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3446 \begin_layout Description
3447 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3450 \begin_layout Description
3455 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3456 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3458 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3462 \begin_layout Description
3463 Slides Used to make transparencies
3466 \begin_layout Description
3468 \begin_inset space ~
3471 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3472 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3475 \begin_layout Description
3476 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3479 \begin_layout Standard
3480 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3482 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3484 Special Document Classes
3491 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3492 of the document classes.
3495 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3499 \begin_layout Standard
3500 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3502 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3503 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3505 \begin_inset Index idx
3508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3525 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3526 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3528 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3531 \begin_layout Standard
3534 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3539 , are highly specialized.
3541 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3542 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3543 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3544 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3545 by some document class.
3546 There are just too many of them.
3547 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3550 \begin_layout Standard
3551 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3556 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3559 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3560 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3561 document class for a new file.
3563 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3566 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3573 manual for information on how to install them.
3574 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3580 \begin_layout Standard
3581 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3582 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3583 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3584 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3585 class files to be used for dissertation
3586 s submitted to those universities.
3587 The \SpecialChar LyX
3588 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3590 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3594 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3600 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3607 name "subsec:Modules"
3612 \begin_inset Index idx
3615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3624 \begin_layout Standard
3625 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3626 chosen document class.
3627 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3628 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3635 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3639 \begin_inset Index idx
3642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3649 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3653 \begin_layout Standard
3654 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3655 packages or file format converters that are not always
3656 installed by default.
3658 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3659 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3660 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3661 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3663 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3664 file without the missing prerequisites.
3665 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3666 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3669 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3673 \begin_inset Index idx
3676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3677 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3684 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3688 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3692 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3701 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3703 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3714 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3717 \begin_layout Standard
3718 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3726 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3728 will advise you about these things.
3736 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3738 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3740 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3745 \begin_inset Index idx
3748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 Document ! Local Layout
3757 \begin_layout Standard
3758 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3759 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3760 : They are intended to be used in
3761 a variety of different documents.
3762 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3763 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3764 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3765 need a specific inset or
3766 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3768 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3771 style only that one time.
3772 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3774 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3792 manual for information on how to use it.
3795 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3799 \begin_layout Standard
3800 Each class has a default set of options.
3801 Here's a quick table describing them:
3804 \begin_layout Standard
3805 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3811 \begin_layout Standard
3813 \begin_inset Tabular
3814 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3815 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3816 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3817 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3820 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4140 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4274 \begin_layout Standard
4275 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4281 \begin_layout Standard
4282 You're probably also wondering what
4283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4287 \begin_inset space ~
4291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4295 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4296 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4301 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4306 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4316 headings, there are also
4324 headings, and so on.
4325 We will describe these headings fully in section
4326 \begin_inset space ~
4330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4332 reference "subsec:Headings"
4339 \begin_layout Subsection
4341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4343 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4348 \begin_inset Index idx
4351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4358 \begin_inset Index idx
4361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4371 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4380 \begin_inset space ~
4388 \begin_inset space ~
4393 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4395 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4396 doesn't support special options you want to
4397 use for your document.
4398 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4399 -class and its options, you have to read
4403 \begin_layout Standard
4405 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4409 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4413 \begin_inset space ~
4420 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4426 \begin_inset space ~
4431 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4432 You can choose between the following five options:
4435 \begin_layout Labeling
4436 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4441 Use default page style of current class.
4444 \begin_layout Labeling
4445 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4450 No page numbers or headings.
4453 \begin_layout Labeling
4454 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4462 \begin_layout Labeling
4463 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4468 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4469 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4470 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4471 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4474 \begin_layout Labeling
4475 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4480 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4481 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4487 \begin_inset Index idx
4490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4498 How they are defined is explained in section
4499 \begin_inset space ~
4503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4505 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4512 \begin_layout Standard
4513 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4514 \begin_inset space ~
4518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4520 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4527 \begin_layout Subsection
4528 Paper Size and Orientation
4529 \begin_inset Index idx
4532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4533 Document ! Paper size
4539 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4541 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4548 \begin_layout Standard
4549 You can find the following options in the menu
4552 \begin_inset space ~
4559 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4563 \begin_inset Index idx
4566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4575 \begin_layout Labeling
4576 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4580 \begin_inset space ~
4585 What size paper to print on.
4590 \begin_layout Itemize
4596 \begin_layout Itemize
4602 \begin_layout Itemize
4608 \begin_layout Itemize
4614 \begin_layout Itemize
4617 US letter, US legal, US executive
4620 \begin_layout Itemize
4626 \begin_layout Itemize
4633 \begin_layout Labeling
4634 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4639 To choose whether to output as
4650 \begin_layout Labeling
4651 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4655 \begin_inset space ~
4660 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4661 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4664 \begin_layout Subsection
4666 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4668 name "subsec:Margins"
4673 \begin_inset Index idx
4676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4683 \begin_inset Index idx
4686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4695 \begin_layout Standard
4696 Paper margins are set in the menu
4698 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4702 \begin_inset Index idx
4705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4714 \begin_layout Standard
4715 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4716 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4717 the paper format and the font size into account.
4720 \begin_layout Subsection
4724 \begin_layout Standard
4725 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4726 has to convert everything into the new
4728 That includes the paragraph environments.
4729 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4730 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4731 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4733 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4738 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4742 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4744 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4745 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4746 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4749 \begin_layout Section
4750 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4751 \begin_inset Index idx
4754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4755 Paragraph ! Indentation
4763 \begin_layout Subsection
4765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4767 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4774 \begin_layout Standard
4775 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4776 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4779 \begin_layout Standard
4780 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4781 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4782 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4783 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4787 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4793 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4794 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4795 language than English.
4797 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4800 \begin_layout Standard
4801 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4802 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4803 into \SpecialChar LyX
4805 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4808 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4810 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4811 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4812 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4819 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4820 goes to produce a printable file.
4825 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4827 gives you the ability globally to change
4831 these pre-coded spacings.
4832 We will explain more later.
4835 \begin_layout Subsection
4836 Paragraph Separation
4837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4839 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4844 \begin_inset Index idx
4847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4848 Paragraph ! Separation
4856 \begin_layout Standard
4864 \begin_inset space ~
4872 \begin_inset space ~
4879 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4883 \begin_inset Index idx
4886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4892 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4895 \begin_layout Subsection
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4900 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4903 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4905 \begin_inset space ~
4910 dialog and toggle the
4913 \begin_inset space ~
4918 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4921 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4925 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4926 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4930 \begin_layout Standard
4931 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4932 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4935 \begin_layout Subsection
4937 \begin_inset Index idx
4940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4941 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4949 \begin_layout Standard
4952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4956 \begin_inset Index idx
4959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4968 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4972 \begin_inset space ~
4981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4982 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4988 \begin_inset Index idx
4991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4998 installed to use this feature.
5003 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5005 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5007 \begin_inset space ~
5012 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5013 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5016 \begin_layout Section
5017 Paragraph Environments
5018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5020 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5025 \begin_inset Index idx
5028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5029 Paragraph ! Environments
5035 \begin_inset Index idx
5038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5039 Paragraph environments|(
5047 \begin_layout Subsection
5051 \begin_layout Standard
5052 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5055 \begin_layout Standard
5064 } \SpecialChar ldots
5074 \begin_inset Newline newline
5077 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5079 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5080 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5081 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5090 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5093 \begin_layout Standard
5094 A paragraph environment is simply a
5095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5099 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5102 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5103 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5104 scheme, labels, and so on.
5105 Additionally, you can
5106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5113 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5114 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5115 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5116 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5118 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5120 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5123 \begin_layout Standard
5124 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5125 \begin_inset Graphics
5126 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5132 at the left end of the toolbar.
5134 will change the environment of the
5138 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5139 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5140 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5143 \begin_layout Standard
5152 create a new paragraph using the
5156 paragraph environment.
5158 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5162 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5165 because if you are in one of these environments:
5168 \begin_layout Itemize
5174 \begin_layout Itemize
5180 \begin_layout Itemize
5186 \begin_layout Itemize
5192 \begin_layout Itemize
5198 \begin_layout Itemize
5204 \begin_layout Itemize
5210 \begin_layout Standard
5212 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5216 , rather than resetting it to
5221 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5222 \begin_inset space ~
5226 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5228 reference "sec:Nesting"
5235 \begin_layout Subsection
5239 \begin_layout Standard
5240 The default paragraph environment is
5245 It creates a plain paragraph.
5247 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5248 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5249 this manual) are in the
5256 \begin_layout Standard
5257 You can nest a paragraph using the
5261 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5269 \begin_layout Subsection
5271 \begin_inset Index idx
5274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5283 \begin_layout Standard
5284 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5285 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5294 for thanks or contact information.
5295 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5296 places all of this on a separate page
5297 along with today's date.
5298 For other types of documents, the title
5299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5306 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5309 \begin_layout Standard
5311 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5325 Here's how you use them:
5328 \begin_layout Itemize
5329 Put the title of your document in the
5336 \begin_layout Itemize
5337 Put the author name in the
5344 \begin_layout Itemize
5345 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5346 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5352 Note that using this environment is optional.
5353 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5354 will automatically insert today's date.
5355 If you don't want a date, use the option
5357 Suppress default date on front page
5361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5362 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5364 \begin_inset space ~
5372 \begin_layout Standard
5373 You can use footnotes to insert
5374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5381 or contact information.
5384 \begin_layout Subsection
5386 \begin_inset Index idx
5389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5398 name "subsec:Headings"
5405 \begin_layout Standard
5406 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5408 takes care of the numbering for you.
5411 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5413 \begin_inset Index idx
5416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5417 Section headings ! Numbered
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5426 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5430 \begin_layout Enumerate
5436 \begin_layout Enumerate
5442 \begin_layout Enumerate
5448 \begin_layout Enumerate
5454 \begin_layout Enumerate
5460 \begin_layout Enumerate
5466 \begin_layout Enumerate
5472 \begin_layout Standard
5474 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5475 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5476 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5477 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5479 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5481 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5487 \begin_layout Standard
5488 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5489 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5490 You group the book into chapters.
5492 does a similar grouping:
5495 \begin_layout Itemize
5500 is divided into either
5511 \begin_layout Itemize
5523 \begin_layout Itemize
5535 \begin_layout Itemize
5547 \begin_layout Itemize
5559 \begin_layout Itemize
5571 \begin_layout Standard
5572 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5580 Not all document types use the
5584 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5589 is the top-level heading.
5597 \begin_layout Standard
5602 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5603 labels it with its number,
5604 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5606 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5618 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5620 \begin_inset Index idx
5623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5624 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5632 \begin_layout Standard
5633 The unnumbered section headings have a
5634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5641 at the end of their name.
5642 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5643 the table of contents, see section
5644 \begin_inset space ~
5648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5657 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5658 Changing the Numbering
5659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5661 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5668 \begin_layout Standard
5669 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5670 in the Table of Contents.
5671 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5673 Just as certain classes start with
5687 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5697 This is something you can change.
5700 \begin_layout Standard
5703 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5707 \begin_inset Index idx
5710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5719 \begin_inset space ~
5723 \begin_inset space ~
5728 you will see two counters.
5733 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5734 numbers a section heading.
5735 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5739 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5740 Short Titles of Headings
5741 \begin_inset Index idx
5744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5745 Section headings ! Short titles
5751 \begin_inset Argument 1
5754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5763 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5770 \begin_layout Standard
5771 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5772 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5773 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5774 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5777 \begin_layout Standard
5779 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5780 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5781 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5782 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5785 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5787 \begin_inset space ~
5793 This will insert a box labeled
5794 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5798 \begin_inset space ~
5802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5805 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5806 This also works for captions inside floats.
5807 There can only be one short title per title.
5810 \begin_layout Standard
5811 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5814 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5818 \begin_layout Standard
5819 The following information applies to all section headings:
5822 \begin_layout Itemize
5823 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5826 \begin_layout Itemize
5827 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5830 \begin_layout Itemize
5831 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5834 \begin_layout Itemize
5835 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5838 \begin_layout Subsection
5842 \begin_layout Standard
5844 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5858 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5859 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5860 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5861 the text they contain.
5862 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5870 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5873 \begin_layout Standard
5874 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5883 when you start a new paragraph.
5884 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5888 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5889 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5890 have to change back to the
5894 environment yourself.
5897 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5906 \begin_inset Index idx
5909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5918 \begin_layout Standard
5919 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5920 time for the differences.
5929 are identical except for one difference:
5933 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5942 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5945 \begin_layout Standard
5946 Here's an example of the
5959 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5961 See – no indentation!
5965 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5966 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5967 the other paragraph.
5970 \begin_layout Standard
5971 Here's another example, this time in the
5978 \begin_layout Quotation
5984 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5985 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5986 the first line, then
5990 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5994 you were quoting other text.
5997 \begin_layout Quotation
5998 Here's a new paragraph.
5999 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6000 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6003 \begin_layout Standard
6004 As the examples show,
6008 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6009 They should put quotes in the
6014 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6018 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6021 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6023 \begin_inset Index idx
6026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6033 \begin_inset Index idx
6036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6052 \begin_layout Standard
6057 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6063 \begin_inset Newline newline
6066 Which I did not rehearse!
6070 It could be much worse.
6071 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6073 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6074 indented a bit more than the first.
6075 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6081 \begin_inset Newline newline
6084 And make things look fine
6085 \begin_inset Newline newline
6091 arg "newline-insert newline"
6097 \begin_layout Standard
6102 does not indent both margins.
6103 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6104 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6107 arg "newline-insert newline"
6113 \begin_layout Subsection
6115 \begin_inset Index idx
6118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6125 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6134 \begin_layout Standard
6136 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6146 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6147 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6156 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6157 lets you provide your own label.
6158 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6159 describing some general features of all four of them.
6162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6166 \begin_layout Standard
6167 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6169 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6170 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6179 reset the environment to
6183 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6184 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6185 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6189 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6193 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6200 \begin_layout Standard
6201 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6202 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6203 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6205 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6206 you read all of section
6207 \begin_inset space ~
6211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6213 reference "sec:Nesting"
6220 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6222 \begin_inset Index idx
6225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6241 \begin_layout Standard
6242 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6246 paragraph environment.
6247 It has the following properties:
6250 \begin_layout Itemize
6251 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6255 \begin_layout Itemize
6257 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6260 \begin_layout Itemize
6261 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6265 \begin_layout Itemize
6266 The items can have any length.
6268 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6269 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6276 \begin_layout Itemize
6281 environment inside another
6285 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6289 \begin_layout Itemize
6290 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6293 \begin_layout Itemize
6295 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6298 \begin_layout Itemize
6300 \begin_inset space ~
6304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6306 reference "sec:Nesting"
6310 for a full explanation of nesting.
6314 \begin_layout Standard
6315 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6324 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6327 \begin_layout Standard
6328 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6329 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6332 \begin_layout Itemize
6333 The label for the first level
6337 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6341 \begin_layout Itemize
6342 The label for the second level is a dash.
6346 \begin_layout Itemize
6347 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6351 \begin_layout Itemize
6352 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6356 \begin_layout Itemize
6357 Back out to the third level.
6361 \begin_layout Itemize
6362 Back to the second level.
6366 \begin_layout Itemize
6367 Back to the outermost level.
6370 \begin_layout Standard
6371 These are the default labels for an
6376 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6378 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6381 dialog in the submenu
6386 \begin_inset Index idx
6389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6395 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6399 \begin_layout Standard
6400 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6401 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6403 \begin_inset space ~
6407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6409 reference "sec:Nesting"
6416 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6418 \begin_inset Index idx
6421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6430 name "sec:Enumerate"
6437 \begin_layout Standard
6442 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6443 It has these properties:
6446 \begin_layout Enumerate
6447 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6451 \begin_layout Enumerate
6452 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6456 \begin_layout Enumerate
6458 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6461 \begin_layout Enumerate
6466 environment resets the counter to one.
6469 \begin_layout Enumerate
6482 \begin_layout Enumerate
6483 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6484 Items can have any length.
6487 \begin_layout Enumerate
6488 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6491 \begin_layout Enumerate
6492 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6495 \begin_layout Enumerate
6496 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6500 \begin_layout Standard
6509 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6511 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6512 labels the four different levels in an
6519 \begin_layout Enumerate
6520 The first level of an
6524 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6528 \begin_layout Enumerate
6529 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6533 \begin_layout Enumerate
6534 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6538 \begin_layout Enumerate
6539 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6542 \begin_layout Enumerate
6543 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6548 \begin_layout Enumerate
6549 Back to the third level
6553 \begin_layout Enumerate
6554 Back to the second level.
6558 \begin_layout Enumerate
6559 Back to the outermost level.
6562 \begin_layout Standard
6563 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6567 environment, see section
6568 \begin_inset space ~
6572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6574 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6579 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6583 \begin_layout Standard
6584 There is more to nesting
6588 environments than we've stated here.
6589 You should read section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "sec:Nesting"
6600 to learn more about nesting.
6603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6605 \begin_inset Index idx
6608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6617 \begin_layout Standard
6618 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6622 list has no fixed label.
6623 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6632 of the first line as the label.
6636 \begin_layout Description
6637 Example: This is an example of the
6644 \begin_layout Standard
6646 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6650 \begin_layout Standard
6652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6659 it is meant that the first usage of the
6663 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6665 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6673 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6679 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6681 \begin_inset space ~
6687 \begin_inset space ~
6691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6693 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6697 for more information.) Here is an example:
6700 \begin_layout Description
6702 \begin_inset space ~
6705 Example: This one shows how to use a
6708 \begin_inset space ~
6720 \begin_layout Description
6721 Usage: You should use the
6725 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6726 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6728 It's not a good idea to use a
6732 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6733 You're better off using
6745 paragraphs into them.
6748 \begin_layout Description
6749 Nesting: You can nest
6753 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6757 \begin_layout Standard
6758 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6759 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6760 them from the first line.
6763 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6765 \begin_inset Index idx
6768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6777 \begin_layout Standard
6782 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6783 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6787 \begin_layout Standard
6796 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6798 Here are its properties:
6801 \begin_layout Labeling
6802 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6804 \begin_inset space ~
6807 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6816 of each line as the item label.
6821 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6822 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6823 space as described above.
6826 \begin_layout Labeling
6827 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6828 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6829 uses different margins for the item label and the
6830 body of the item text.
6831 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6832 label width plus a little extra space.
6835 \begin_layout Labeling
6836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6838 \begin_inset space ~
6841 width \SpecialChar LyX
6842 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6843 If the label width is larger, the label
6844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6851 into the first line.
6852 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6853 margin of the rest of the item text.
6856 \begin_layout Labeling
6857 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6859 \begin_inset space ~
6862 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6867 environment has the same left margin.
6868 \begin_inset Newline newline
6871 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6874 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6876 \begin_inset space ~
6881 dialog (toolbar button
6884 arg "layout-paragraph"
6891 \begin_inset space ~
6896 determines the default label width.
6897 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6899 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6903 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6906 multiple times instead.
6907 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6917 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6920 \begin_inset space ~
6925 every time you alter a label in a
6930 \begin_inset Newline newline
6933 The predefined default width is the length of
6934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6942 \begin_inset space ~
6948 \begin_layout Standard
6953 list the same way as the
6957 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6963 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6967 \begin_layout Standard
6972 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6973 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6975 \begin_inset space ~
6979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6981 reference "sec:Nesting"
6985 to learn about nesting.
6988 \begin_layout Standard
6989 There is yet another feature of the
6993 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6994 left-justifies the item labels by
6996 You can use additional
7000 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7001 justifies the item label.
7006 are documented in section
7007 \begin_inset space ~
7011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7013 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7018 Here are some examples:
7021 \begin_layout Labeling
7022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7023 Left The default for
7030 \begin_layout Labeling
7031 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7032 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7039 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7042 \begin_layout Labeling
7043 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7044 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7048 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7055 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7058 \begin_layout Subsection
7060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7062 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7067 \begin_inset Index idx
7070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7079 \begin_layout Standard
7080 The features described in this section require that the module
7082 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7084 is loaded in the document settings.
7085 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7091 \begin_inset Index idx
7094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7105 Custom Enumerate Lists
7106 \begin_inset Index idx
7109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7110 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7118 \begin_layout Standard
7120 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7126 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7127 There you add the command
7130 \begin_layout Standard
7138 \begin_layout Standard
7150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7151 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7152 Code, look at section
7153 \begin_inset space ~
7157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7159 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7172 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7179 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7180 For capital Roman numerals replace
7192 in the command above.
7193 For Arabic numerals use
7201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7208 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7223 \begin_layout Standard
7225 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 You can only number 26
7234 \begin_inset space ~
7237 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7245 \begin_layout Standard
7246 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7247 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7250 \begin_layout Standard
7251 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7254 \begin_layout Enumerate
7255 \begin_inset Argument 1
7258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7284 \begin_layout Enumerate
7285 \begin_inset Argument 1
7288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7311 \begin_layout Enumerate
7316 \begin_layout Enumerate
7317 \begin_inset Argument 1
7320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7344 \begin_layout Enumerate
7345 \begin_inset Argument 1
7348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7374 \begin_layout Standard
7375 For this list these commands were used:
7378 \begin_layout Standard
7389 \begin_inset Newline newline
7397 \begin_inset Newline newline
7405 \begin_inset Newline newline
7415 \begin_layout Standard
7422 makes the label emphasized and
7431 \begin_layout Standard
7432 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7441 lists until you change the definition.
7449 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7451 \begin_inset Index idx
7454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7455 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7463 \begin_layout Standard
7464 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7467 \begin_layout Enumerate
7468 \begin_inset Argument 1
7471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7490 \begin_inset Note Note
7493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7494 goes back to default numbering
7502 \begin_layout Enumerate
7506 \begin_layout Standard
7510 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7514 \begin_layout Standard
7515 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7520 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7521 to indicate that it is a resumed
7522 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7523 , but in the output.
7526 \begin_layout Standard
7527 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7535 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7544 \begin_layout Standard
7545 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7547 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7548 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7549 of a normal enumeration.
7550 There, insert the command
7553 \begin_layout Standard
7559 \begin_layout Standard
7564 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7568 \begin_layout Enumerate
7572 \begin_layout Enumerate
7576 \begin_layout Standard
7577 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7580 \begin_layout Enumerate
7581 \begin_inset Argument 1
7584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7600 This enumeration starts at 4
7603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7605 \begin_inset Index idx
7608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7618 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7620 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7623 \begin_layout Itemize
7627 \begin_layout Itemize
7628 with standard spacing
7631 \begin_layout Standard
7632 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7634 Add there the command
7638 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7641 \begin_layout Itemize
7642 \begin_inset Argument 1
7645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7664 \begin_layout Itemize
7668 \begin_layout Itemize
7672 \begin_layout Standard
7673 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7680 \begin_inset Index idx
7683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7691 For more information see its documentation,
7692 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7702 \begin_layout Standard
7703 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7705 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7706 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7710 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7713 \begin_layout Enumerate
7714 \begin_inset Argument 1
7717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7725 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7738 \begin_layout Enumerate
7739 with negative indentation
7742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7743 Further Customization
7744 \begin_inset Index idx
7747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7748 Lists ! Customization
7756 \begin_layout Standard
7757 You can also change the style of description lists.
7761 \begin_layout Standard
7767 \begin_layout Standard
7768 changes the description label font, the command
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7777 \begin_layout Standard
7778 sets the list style.
7781 \begin_layout Standard
7782 An example where the command
7785 \begin_layout Standard
7790 itshape, style=nextline
7793 \begin_layout Standard
7797 \begin_layout Description
7799 \begin_inset space ~
7803 \begin_inset Argument 1
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7812 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7814 itshape, style=nextline
7824 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7825 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7829 \begin_layout Description
7831 \begin_inset space ~
7834 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7835 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7836 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7839 \begin_layout Standard
7840 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7846 \begin_inset Index idx
7849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7857 For more information see its documentation
7858 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7868 \begin_layout Subsection
7870 \begin_inset Index idx
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7882 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7884 \begin_inset space ~
7887 Address: An Overview
7890 \begin_layout Standard
7891 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7892 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7900 \begin_inset space ~
7906 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7907 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7908 gags on the document.
7909 In contrast, you can use the
7916 \begin_inset space ~
7921 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7922 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7926 \begin_layout Standard
7927 Of course, you're not limited to using
7934 \begin_inset space ~
7943 \begin_inset space ~
7948 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7949 some European academic papers.
7952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7954 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7956 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7963 \begin_layout Standard
7968 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7969 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7973 \begin_inset space ~
7978 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7979 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7980 Here's an example of each:
7983 \begin_layout Right Address
7985 \begin_inset Newline newline
7989 \begin_inset Newline newline
7993 \begin_inset Newline newline
7996 When is it? What is today?
7999 \begin_layout Standard
8003 \begin_inset space ~
8009 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8011 the largest block of text on a single line.
8012 Here's an example of the
8019 \begin_layout Address
8021 \begin_inset Newline newline
8024 Where do I send this
8025 \begin_inset Newline newline
8028 Your post office and country
8031 \begin_layout Standard
8032 As you can see, both
8039 \begin_inset space ~
8044 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8049 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8050 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8056 This makes sense, since
8064 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8065 Thus, you have to use
8072 arg "newline-insert newline"
8077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8078 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8080 \begin_inset space ~
8084 \begin_inset space ~
8089 ) to start a new line in an
8096 \begin_inset space ~
8104 \begin_layout Subsection
8108 \begin_layout Standard
8109 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8110 or list of references.
8112 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8115 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8117 \begin_inset Index idx
8120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8129 \begin_layout Standard
8134 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8135 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8136 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8137 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8141 in anything else or vice versa.
8147 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8148 The book document classes ignores the
8152 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8156 in a letter document class.
8159 \begin_layout Standard
8164 environment does several things for you.
8165 First, it puts the centered label
8166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8174 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8176 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8177 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8178 the subsequent text.
8179 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8181 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8185 \begin_layout Standard
8186 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8190 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8191 The new paragraph will still be in the
8196 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8197 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8200 \begin_layout Standard
8201 \begin_inset Float figure
8208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8210 \begin_inset Graphics
8211 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8219 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8222 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8224 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8245 \begin_layout Standard
8246 We would love to demonstrate the
8250 environment, but since this document is in the
8251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8258 class, we can't do this.
8259 We inserted it therefore as figure
8260 \begin_inset space ~
8264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8266 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8271 If you have never heard of an
8272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8279 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8282 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8284 \begin_inset Index idx
8287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8296 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8303 \begin_layout Standard
8308 environment is used to list references.
8309 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8310 only use it at the end of the document.
8322 \begin_layout Standard
8323 When you first open a
8327 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8328 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8344 depending on the document class.
8345 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8346 Each paragraph of the
8350 environment is a bibliography entry.
8355 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8356 Each new paragraph is still in the
8363 \begin_layout Standard
8364 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8365 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8367 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8369 handling, have a look at section
8370 \begin_inset space ~
8374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8376 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8383 \begin_layout Subsection
8384 Special Environments
8387 \begin_layout Standard
8389 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8390 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8393 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8398 \begin_inset Index idx
8401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8411 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8418 \begin_layout Standard
8424 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8426 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8431 key as a fixed whitespace.
8435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8448 \begin_inset space ~
8453 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8471 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8474 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8477 arg "newline-insert newline"
8494 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8495 So, when you finish using the
8500 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8501 Also, you can nest the
8506 environment inside of others.
8509 \begin_layout Standard
8510 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8513 \begin_layout Itemize
8517 arg "newline-insert newline"
8520 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8521 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8525 \begin_inset space \space{}
8535 arg "newline-insert newline"
8541 \begin_layout Itemize
8545 arg "newline-insert newline"
8555 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8561 \begin_layout Itemize
8562 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8563 You must put at least one
8567 in any line you want blank.
8568 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8573 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8577 since that will insert
8582 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8585 arg "self-insert \""
8591 \begin_layout Standard
8595 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8599 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8603 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8607 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8611 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8612 printf("Hello World!
8617 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8621 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8625 \begin_layout Standard
8626 This is just the standard
8627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8637 \begin_layout Standard
8643 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8645 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8646 as if you used a typewriter.
8647 \begin_inset Index idx
8650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8651 Paragraph environments|)
8656 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8659 Program Code Listings
8664 \begin_inset space ~
8672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8676 \begin_inset Index idx
8679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8688 \begin_layout Standard
8693 environment is similar to the
8698 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8699 computer console text.
8704 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8718 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8719 you can have empty lines.
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8733 have a certain language and a text style
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8737 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8738 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8739 and \SpecialChar TeX
8743 \begin_layout Standard
8744 Because of these properties
8748 works like a typewriter.
8752 \begin_layout Verbatim
8756 \begin_layout Verbatim
8759 The following 2 lines are empty:
8762 \begin_layout Verbatim
8766 \begin_layout Verbatim
8770 \begin_layout Verbatim
8771 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8776 \begin_layout Standard
8781 environment is identical to
8785 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8786 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8793 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8797 \begin_layout Section
8798 Nesting Environments
8799 \begin_inset Index idx
8802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8803 Nesting ! Environments
8809 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8818 \begin_layout Subsection
8822 \begin_layout Standard
8824 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8826 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8828 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8830 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8842 \begin_layout Enumerate
8846 \begin_layout Enumerate
8851 \begin_layout Enumerate
8855 \begin_layout Enumerate
8860 \begin_layout Enumerate
8864 \begin_layout Standard
8865 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8866 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8868 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8870 \begin_inset space ~
8874 \begin_inset space ~
8882 \begin_inset space ~
8886 \begin_inset space ~
8891 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8893 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8896 arg "depth-increment"
8902 arg "depth-decrement"
8916 arg "depth-increment"
8922 arg "depth-decrement"
8926 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8927 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8931 \begin_layout Standard
8932 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8933 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8934 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8935 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8936 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8939 \begin_layout Standard
8940 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8942 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8944 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8947 \begin_layout Subsection
8948 What You Can and Can't Nest
8951 \begin_layout Standard
8952 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8953 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8956 \begin_layout Standard
8957 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8958 than a simple yes or no.
8959 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8962 \begin_layout Itemize
8963 Completely unnestable
8966 \begin_layout Itemize
8967 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8971 \begin_layout Itemize
8972 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8976 \begin_layout Standard
8977 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8978 environments have them:
8981 \begin_layout Description
8982 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8983 Can't nest into them.
8987 \begin_layout Itemize
8993 \begin_layout Itemize
8999 \begin_layout Itemize
9005 \begin_layout Itemize
9011 \begin_layout Itemize
9018 \begin_layout Description
9020 \begin_inset space ~
9023 Nestable You can nest them.
9024 You can nest other things into them.
9028 \begin_layout Itemize
9034 \begin_layout Itemize
9040 \begin_layout Itemize
9046 \begin_layout Itemize
9052 \begin_layout Itemize
9058 \begin_layout Itemize
9064 \begin_layout Itemize
9070 \begin_layout Itemize
9077 \begin_layout Itemize
9083 \begin_layout Itemize
9090 \begin_layout Description
9091 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9092 You can't nest anything into them.
9096 \begin_layout Itemize
9102 \begin_layout Itemize
9108 \begin_layout Itemize
9114 \begin_layout Itemize
9120 \begin_layout Itemize
9126 \begin_layout Itemize
9132 \begin_layout Itemize
9138 \begin_layout Itemize
9144 \begin_layout Itemize
9150 \begin_layout Itemize
9156 \begin_layout Itemize
9162 \begin_layout Itemize
9168 \begin_layout Itemize
9174 \begin_layout Itemize
9178 \begin_inset space ~
9184 \begin_layout Itemize
9191 \begin_layout Standard
9192 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9200 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9210 \begin_inset space ~
9213 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9214 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9215 nested section headings violate this.
9223 \begin_layout Subsection
9224 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9225 \begin_inset Index idx
9228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9229 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9237 \begin_layout Standard
9238 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9239 affected by nesting anyhow.
9243 \begin_layout Itemize
9247 \begin_layout Itemize
9251 \begin_layout Itemize
9255 \begin_layout Standard
9257 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9265 Figures and tables in
9269 are not affected by this.
9274 Have a look at section
9275 \begin_inset space ~
9279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9281 reference "sec:Floats"
9285 for more information about
9292 \begin_layout Standard
9294 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9295 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9299 \begin_layout Standard
9300 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9308 of its own, it behaves just like a
9309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9316 paragraph environment.
9317 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9321 \begin_layout Standard
9322 Here's an example with a table:
9325 \begin_layout Enumerate
9330 \begin_layout Enumerate
9331 This is (a) and it's nested.
9335 \begin_layout Standard
9336 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9342 \begin_layout Standard
9344 \begin_inset Tabular
9345 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9346 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9347 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9348 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9432 \begin_layout Standard
9433 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9440 \begin_layout Enumerate
9442 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9446 \begin_layout Enumerate
9450 \begin_layout Standard
9451 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9454 \begin_layout Enumerate
9459 \begin_layout Enumerate
9460 This is (a) and it's nested.
9464 \begin_layout Standard
9465 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9471 \begin_layout Standard
9473 \begin_inset Tabular
9474 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9475 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9476 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9477 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9561 \begin_layout Standard
9562 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9568 \begin_layout Enumerate
9575 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9578 \begin_layout Enumerate
9582 \begin_layout Standard
9583 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9587 \begin_layout Standard
9588 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9591 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9594 \begin_layout Enumerate
9599 \begin_layout Enumerate
9600 This is (a) and it's nested.
9603 \begin_layout Standard
9604 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9610 \begin_layout Standard
9612 \begin_inset Tabular
9613 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9614 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9615 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9616 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9701 \begin_layout Standard
9702 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9708 \begin_layout Enumerate
9710 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9717 \begin_layout Enumerate
9721 \begin_layout Standard
9722 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9728 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9729 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9733 \begin_layout Subsection
9734 Usage and General Features
9737 \begin_layout Standard
9738 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9739 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9748 is the innermost possible depth.
9749 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9752 \begin_layout Enumerate
9753 level #1 – outermost
9757 \begin_layout Enumerate
9762 \begin_layout Enumerate
9767 \begin_layout Enumerate
9772 \begin_layout Itemize
9777 \begin_layout Itemize
9786 \begin_layout Standard
9787 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9788 both of them in the example.
9789 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9799 For example, if we tried to nest another
9804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9811 , we would get errors.
9814 \begin_layout Subsection
9816 \begin_inset Index idx
9819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9828 \begin_layout Standard
9829 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9830 We have several examples of nested environments.
9831 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9835 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9836 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9839 \begin_layout Labeling
9840 \labelwidthstring MMM
9841 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9850 \begin_layout Labeling
9851 \labelwidthstring MMM
9852 #2-a This is level #2.
9853 We created it by using
9856 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9862 arg "depth-increment"
9869 \begin_layout Labeling
9870 \labelwidthstring MMM
9871 #3-a This is level #3.
9872 This time, we just enter
9879 arg "depth-increment"
9883 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9887 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9893 arg "depth-increment"
9900 \begin_layout Standard
9905 environment, nested inside of
9906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9914 So, it's at level #4.
9915 We did this by entering
9918 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9924 arg "depth-increment"
9927 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9932 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9948 \begin_layout Standard
9953 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9956 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9962 \begin_layout Labeling
9963 \labelwidthstring MMM
9964 #4-a This is level #4.
9968 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9971 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9976 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9980 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9985 keep nesting things inside
9986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9997 \begin_layout Labeling
9998 \labelwidthstring MMM
9999 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10004 \begin_layout Labeling
10005 \labelwidthstring MMM
10006 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10007 and this is level #6.
10008 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10012 \begin_layout Labeling
10013 \labelwidthstring MMM
10014 #5-b Back to level #5.
10018 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10024 arg "depth-decrement"
10031 \begin_layout Labeling
10032 \labelwidthstring MMM
10036 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10042 arg "depth-decrement"
10045 , we're back at level #4.
10049 \begin_layout Labeling
10050 \labelwidthstring MMM
10051 #3-b Back to level #3.
10052 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10056 \begin_layout Labeling
10057 \labelwidthstring MMM
10058 #2-b Back to level #2.
10062 \begin_layout Labeling
10063 \labelwidthstring MMM
10064 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10065 After this sentence, we will enter
10069 and change the paragraph environment back to
10076 \begin_layout Standard
10077 We could have also used the
10093 environment in place of the
10098 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10101 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10102 Example 2: Inheritance
10105 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10106 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10109 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10118 arg "depth-increment"
10122 \begin_inset Newline newline
10125 which, we will change to the
10133 \begin_layout Enumerate
10138 environment, at level #2.
10141 \begin_layout Enumerate
10142 Notice how the nested
10146 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10150 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10154 \begin_layout Standard
10155 We ended this example by entering
10160 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10164 and reset the nesting depth by using
10167 arg "depth-decrement"
10173 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10174 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10183 \begin_inset Argument 1
10186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10187 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10195 \begin_layout Enumerate
10196 This is level #1, in an
10200 paragraph environment.
10201 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10205 \begin_layout Enumerate
10210 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10216 arg "depth-increment"
10220 Now, what happens if we nest an
10224 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10225 label be? An asterisk?
10229 \begin_layout Itemize
10239 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10240 So, its label is a bullet.
10241 (We got here by using
10244 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10250 arg "depth-increment"
10253 , then changing the environment to
10261 \begin_layout Itemize
10262 Here's level #4, produced using
10265 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10271 arg "depth-increment"
10275 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10280 \begin_layout Enumerate
10282 to get to level #5.
10283 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10288 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10292 , because we are in the
10300 environment (that is, it is an
10315 \begin_layout Enumerate
10320 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10321 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10325 \begin_layout Enumerate
10326 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10329 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10332 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10335 \begin_layout Enumerate
10339 arg "depth-decrement"
10342 to decrease the depth after the next
10345 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10352 \begin_layout Enumerate
10354 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10359 \begin_layout Enumerate
10361 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10362 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10366 \begin_layout Enumerate
10367 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10376 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10381 reset the counter for the label.
10385 \begin_layout Enumerate
10389 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10395 arg "depth-decrement"
10398 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10399 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10400 into the twofold-nested
10408 \begin_layout Enumerate
10409 The same thing happens if we do another
10412 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10418 arg "depth-decrement"
10421 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10424 \begin_layout Standard
10425 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10430 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10441 The number of other
10445 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10452 The same rule applies for the
10456 environment, as well.
10459 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10460 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10463 \begin_layout Enumerate
10464 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10465 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10466 the same detail with how we did it.
10475 \begin_layout Standard
10483 arg "depth-increment"
10490 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10491 the example in parentheses someplace.
10492 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10493 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10494 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10498 \begin_layout Enumerate
10503 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10507 \begin_layout Verse
10508 Now we will add verse.
10509 \begin_inset Newline newline
10512 It will get much worse.
10513 \begin_inset Newline newline
10523 arg "depth-increment"
10533 \begin_layout Verse
10534 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10535 \begin_inset Newline newline
10538 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10539 \begin_inset Newline newline
10545 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10553 \begin_layout Verse
10554 Here comes a table:
10558 \begin_layout Standard
10559 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10565 \begin_layout Standard
10567 \begin_inset Tabular
10568 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10569 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10570 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10571 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10656 \begin_layout Verse
10660 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10670 arg "depth-increment"
10676 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10682 \begin_inset Newline newline
10690 arg "depth-decrement"
10697 \begin_layout Enumerate
10702 : level #1) This is another item.
10703 Note that selecting a
10707 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10708 3 times to put the table inside the
10715 \begin_layout Quotation
10716 We're now ending the
10720 list and changing to
10725 We're still at level #1.
10726 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10727 The next set of paragraphs is a
10728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10735 We will nest both the
10742 \begin_inset space ~
10747 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10751 for the letter body.
10755 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10758 to preserve the depth.
10759 Remember that you need to use
10762 arg "newline-insert newline"
10765 to create multiple lines inside the
10772 \begin_inset space ~
10782 \begin_layout Right Address
10784 \begin_inset Newline newline
10787 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10788 \begin_inset Newline newline
10794 \begin_layout Address
10796 \begin_inset space ~
10802 \begin_layout Quotation
10803 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10807 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10808 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10809 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10810 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10811 as soon as possible.
10812 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10815 \begin_layout Quotation
10816 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10817 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10818 with your order, along with payment.
10821 \begin_layout Quotation
10822 We thank you again for your patience.
10825 \begin_layout Address
10827 \begin_inset Newline newline
10834 \begin_layout Quotation
10835 That ends that example!
10838 \begin_layout Standard
10839 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10840 gives you a lot of power with just
10842 We could have easily nested an
10863 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10866 \begin_layout Subsection
10868 \begin_inset Index idx
10871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10872 Nesting ! Separation
10878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10880 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10887 \begin_layout Standard
10888 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10890 For example you need two different enumerations:
10893 \begin_layout Enumerate
10898 \begin_layout Enumerate
10903 \begin_layout Enumerate
10907 \begin_layout Standard
10908 \begin_inset Separator plain
10914 \begin_layout Itemize
10920 \begin_layout Standard
10921 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10927 \begin_layout Enumerate
10931 \begin_layout Enumerate
10935 \begin_layout Enumerate
10939 \begin_layout Standard
10940 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10941 list item and use the menu
10943 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10944 Separated <Name> Above
10948 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10949 Separated <Name> Below
10952 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10953 ) and before or behind it the
10955 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
10958 \begin_layout Standard
10959 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10960 (red arrow in LyX).
10961 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10962 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10965 \begin_layout Standard
10966 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10969 arg "paragraph-break"
10976 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10979 \begin_layout Section
10980 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10981 \begin_inset Index idx
10984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10993 \begin_layout Standard
10994 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10995 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10997 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10998 be broken at the end of a line.
10999 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11003 \begin_layout Subsection
11005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11007 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11012 \begin_inset Index idx
11015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11024 \begin_layout Standard
11025 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11026 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11027 ) not to break the line at
11029 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11032 \begin_layout Quote
11033 Further documentation is given in section
11034 \begin_inset Newline newline
11038 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11040 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11047 \begin_layout Standard
11048 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11061 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11063 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11072 A protected space is set with
11074 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11075 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11077 \begin_inset space ~
11085 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11091 \begin_layout Subsection
11093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11095 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11100 \begin_inset Index idx
11103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11104 Spacing ! Horizontal
11112 \begin_layout Standard
11113 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11116 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11120 The length units are listed in Appendix
11121 \begin_inset space ~
11125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11127 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11134 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11138 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11143 \begin_inset Index idx
11146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11147 Spaces ! Inter-word
11155 \begin_layout Standard
11156 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11157 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11158 at the ends of sentences.
11159 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11160 automatically takes care about this.
11161 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11162 followed by a period; see section
11163 \begin_inset space ~
11167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11169 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11174 To insert a normal space, select
11176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11177 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11179 \begin_inset space ~
11187 arg "space-insert normal"
11193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11197 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11202 \begin_inset Index idx
11205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11214 \begin_layout Standard
11216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11223 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11232 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11233 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11234 inside abbreviations:
11237 \begin_layout Quote
11239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11243 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11246 \begin_layout Standard
11247 or between values and units.
11248 Compare for example this:
11249 \begin_inset Newline newline
11253 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11257 \begin_inset Newline newline
11260 10 kg (normal space
11263 \begin_layout Standard
11264 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11266 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11267 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11269 \begin_inset space ~
11277 arg "space-insert thin"
11283 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11287 \begin_layout Standard
11288 You can also insert the following space types:
11291 \begin_layout Description
11293 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11295 \begin_inset space ~
11301 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11305 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11309 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11313 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11315 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11318 space between the arrows.
11319 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11323 \begin_layout Description
11325 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11327 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11331 \begin_inset space ~
11334 space A line with a
11335 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11339 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11343 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11347 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11349 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11352 space between the arrows.
11355 \begin_layout Description
11357 \begin_inset space ~
11361 \begin_inset space ~
11364 space A line with a
11365 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11369 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11373 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11376 negative thin space between the arrows.
11379 \begin_layout Description
11381 \begin_inset space ~
11385 \begin_inset space ~
11388 space A line with a
11389 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11393 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11397 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11400 negative medium space between the arrows.
11403 \begin_layout Description
11405 \begin_inset space ~
11409 \begin_inset space ~
11412 space A line with a
11413 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11417 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11421 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11424 negative thick space between the arrows.
11427 \begin_layout Description
11429 \begin_inset space ~
11433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11437 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11441 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11445 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11449 \begin_inset space ~
11453 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11456 em) space between the arrows.
11459 \begin_layout Description
11461 \begin_inset space ~
11465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11469 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11473 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11477 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11481 \begin_inset space ~
11485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11488 em) space between the arrows.
11491 \begin_layout Description
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11501 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11505 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11509 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11513 \begin_inset space ~
11517 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11520 em) space between the arrows.
11523 \begin_layout Description
11525 \begin_inset space ~
11529 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11533 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11538 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11542 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11545 cm space between the arrows.
11548 \begin_layout Standard
11550 \begin_inset space ~
11554 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11556 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11560 lists the different space sizes.
11563 \begin_layout Standard
11564 \begin_inset Float table
11571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11572 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11577 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11581 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11591 \begin_inset Tabular
11592 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11593 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11594 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11635 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11692 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11698 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11709 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11720 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11726 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11737 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11763 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11767 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11819 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11834 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11847 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11926 \begin_inset Index idx
11929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11938 \begin_layout Standard
11939 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11940 feature for adding extra space
11941 in a uniform fashion.
11942 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11943 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11944 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11945 equally between themselves.
11948 \begin_layout Standard
11949 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11952 \begin_layout Quote
11954 This is on the left side
11955 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11958 This is on the right
11961 \begin_layout Quote
11964 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11968 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11974 \begin_layout Quote
11977 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11981 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11985 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11991 \begin_layout Standard
11992 That was an example in the
11998 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12002 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12006 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12009 is one in a standard paragraph.
12010 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12014 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12017 \begin_layout Standard
12018 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12021 \begin_inset space ~
12026 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12029 \begin_layout Standard
12031 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12035 \begin_inset space ~
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12043 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12047 \begin_inset space ~
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12059 \begin_inset space ~
12065 \begin_layout Standard
12067 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12071 \begin_inset space ~
12077 \begin_layout Standard
12079 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12081 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12085 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12086 (= opened downwards)
12089 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12093 \begin_inset space ~
12099 \begin_layout Standard
12101 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12103 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12107 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12111 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12115 \begin_inset space ~
12121 \begin_layout Standard
12122 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12130 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12134 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12136 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12137 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12141 option in the space dialog.
12149 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12153 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12158 \begin_inset Index idx
12161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12170 \begin_layout Standard
12171 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12172 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12175 \begin_layout Standard
12176 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12179 What is correct English?:
12180 \begin_inset Newline newline
12184 \begin_inset Newline newline
12188 \begin_inset space ~
12191 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12192 \begin_inset Newline newline
12196 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12207 \begin_inset Newline newline
12211 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12222 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12228 \begin_layout Standard
12230 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12235 \begin_inset space ~
12239 \begin_inset space ~
12243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12247 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12249 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12250 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12254 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12260 \begin_inset space ~
12264 \begin_inset space ~
12268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12271 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12280 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12281 That is why it is named
12282 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12290 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12291 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12295 \begin_layout Subsection
12297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12299 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12304 \begin_inset Index idx
12307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12316 \begin_layout Standard
12317 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12319 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12320 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12322 \begin_inset space ~
12328 There you find the following sizes:
12331 \begin_layout Standard
12344 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12345 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12350 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12353 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12355 \begin_inset space ~
12361 \begin_inset Index idx
12364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12365 Document ! Settings
12370 for the paragraph separation.
12371 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12380 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12384 \begin_layout Standard
12386 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12395 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12396 size including line spacing.
12401 \begin_layout Standard
12407 \begin_inset Index idx
12410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12416 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12417 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12422 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12423 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12432 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12441 s are described in section
12442 \begin_inset space ~
12446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12448 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12457 If there are several
12461 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12462 You can therefore use
12466 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12469 \begin_layout Standard
12474 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12475 \begin_inset space ~
12479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12481 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12488 \begin_layout Standard
12489 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12499 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12500 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12512 \begin_layout Subsection
12513 Paragraph Alignment
12514 \begin_inset Index idx
12517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12518 Paragraph ! Alignment
12526 \begin_layout Standard
12527 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12529 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12532 dialog (toolbar button
12535 arg "layout-paragraph"
12539 There are five possibilities:
12542 \begin_layout Itemize
12550 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12556 \begin_layout Itemize
12564 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12570 \begin_layout Itemize
12578 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12584 \begin_layout Itemize
12592 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12598 \begin_layout Itemize
12606 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12612 \begin_layout Standard
12613 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12614 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12615 the left and right margins.
12616 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12619 \begin_layout Standard
12621 This paragraph is right aligned,
12624 \begin_layout Standard
12626 this one is centered,
12629 \begin_layout Standard
12631 this one is left aligned.
12634 \begin_layout Subsection
12636 \begin_inset Index idx
12639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12640 Page breaks ! Forced
12646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12648 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12655 \begin_layout Standard
12656 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12657 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12658 force a page break where you want one.
12659 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12660 is good at page breaking.
12661 Only if you use a lot of
12665 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12666 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12669 \begin_layout Standard
12670 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12671 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12675 have to change the page breaking.
12678 \begin_layout Standard
12679 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12681 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12684 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12686 \begin_inset space ~
12692 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12694 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12695 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12697 \begin_inset space ~
12702 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12704 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12705 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12708 \begin_layout Standard
12709 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12710 at the top of a page.
12711 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12713 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12714 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12715 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12719 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12723 to learn more about
12730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12734 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12739 \begin_inset Index idx
12742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12743 Page breaks ! Clear
12751 \begin_layout Standard
12752 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12753 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12754 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12755 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12756 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12759 \begin_layout Standard
12760 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12762 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12763 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12765 \begin_inset space ~
12771 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12773 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12774 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12776 \begin_inset space ~
12780 \begin_inset space ~
12785 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12786 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12789 \begin_layout Subsection
12791 \begin_inset Index idx
12794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12801 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12803 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12810 \begin_layout Standard
12811 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12813 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12815 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12816 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12818 \begin_inset space ~
12822 \begin_inset space ~
12830 arg "newline-insert newline"
12834 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12836 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12837 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12839 \begin_inset space ~
12843 \begin_inset space ~
12851 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12854 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12856 This is useful to avoid
12857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12864 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12867 \begin_layout Standard
12868 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12869 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12871 very good at line breaking.
12872 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12873 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12874 \begin_inset space ~
12878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12880 reference "sec:Quote"
12885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12887 reference "sec:Verse"
12892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12894 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12901 \begin_layout Subsection
12903 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12905 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12910 \begin_inset Index idx
12913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12922 \begin_layout Standard
12924 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12935 \begin_layout Standard
12939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12940 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12942 \begin_inset space ~
12947 you can insert horizontal lines.
12948 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12949 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12950 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12953 \begin_layout Standard
12955 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12966 \begin_layout Section
12967 Characters and Symbols
12970 \begin_layout Standard
12971 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12972 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12973 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12981 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12985 for information on how this is done.
12988 \begin_layout Standard
12989 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12994 dialog via the menu
12996 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12997 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13003 \begin_layout Standard
13004 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13012 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13013 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13015 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13023 \begin_layout Section
13024 Fonts and Text Styles
13025 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13027 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13034 \begin_layout Subsection
13036 \begin_inset Index idx
13039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13048 \begin_layout Standard
13049 There are two types of fonts:
13052 \begin_layout Description
13054 \begin_inset space ~
13058 \begin_inset Index idx
13061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13067 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13072 characters) in the font.
13073 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13074 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13075 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13076 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13077 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13078 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13079 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13080 \begin_inset Newline newline
13083 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13084 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13085 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13086 sizes than at small ones.
13087 \begin_inset Newline newline
13101 \begin_inset space ~
13109 \begin_layout Description
13111 \begin_inset space ~
13115 \begin_inset Index idx
13118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13124 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13125 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13126 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13127 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13128 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13129 image manipulation program.
13130 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13131 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13132 \begin_inset space ~
13135 pixels high up to 34
13136 \begin_inset space ~
13139 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13140 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13141 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13143 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13144 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13145 \begin_inset Newline newline
13148 Bitmap fonts are named
13151 \begin_inset space ~
13156 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13159 \begin_layout Standard
13160 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13161 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13162 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13163 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13164 use scalable fonts.
13167 \begin_layout Standard
13168 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13171 \begin_layout Standard
13172 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13174 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13176 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13179 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13180 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13181 font, to emphasize text you use an
13182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13190 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13192 In \SpecialChar LyX
13193 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13197 \begin_layout Subsection
13200 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13202 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13209 \begin_layout Standard
13210 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13211 used its own fonts.
13212 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13213 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13216 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13217 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13218 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13219 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13220 to a word processor.
13221 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13222 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13223 files are very portable across
13224 different machines.
13225 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13226 has increased a lot
13227 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13230 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13232 \begin_inset space ~
13236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13238 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13243 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13244 code in the document
13245 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13248 \begin_layout Standard
13249 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13250 engines that are also able directly
13251 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13253 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13255 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13257 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13258 that is installed on your system.
13259 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13262 \begin_layout Standard
13263 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13271 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13272 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13280 \begin_layout Subsection
13281 Document Font and Font size
13282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13284 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13289 \begin_inset Index idx
13292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13299 \begin_inset Index idx
13302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13311 \begin_layout Standard
13312 You can set the document fonts in the
13314 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13318 \begin_inset Index idx
13321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13322 Document ! Settings
13332 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13333 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13336 \begin_inset space ~
13345 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13347 \begin_inset space ~
13350 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13353 \begin_layout Standard
13358 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13359 This requires that you use
13371 as the output format, i.
13372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13376 \begin_inset space \space{}
13379 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13380 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13381 installed (see section
13382 \begin_inset space ~
13386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13388 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13393 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13395 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13396 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13398 \begin_inset space ~
13401 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13402 cannot determine the family.
13403 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13404 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13407 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13410 \begin_layout Standard
13411 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13412 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13417 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13423 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13425 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13427 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13430 font encoding, this is
13431 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13432 , depending on the document language,
13435 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13436 either the the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13444 \begin_inset space ~
13450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13460 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13461 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13469 \begin_inset space ~
13475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13483 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13504 European Computer Modern
13507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13515 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13518 \begin_layout Standard
13523 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13524 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13529 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13532 \begin_inset space ~
13537 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13543 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13544 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13547 \begin_layout Itemize
13551 \begin_inset space ~
13556 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13569 \begin_inset space ~
13574 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13575 community in order to replace
13579 as the default font.
13580 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13581 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13584 \begin_inset space ~
13597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13598 One difference is improved kerning.
13606 \begin_layout Itemize
13607 If you do not like the look of
13615 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13620 \begin_inset space ~
13626 \begin_inset space ~
13636 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13637 \begin_inset space ~
13640 serif and typewriter fonts,
13644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13645 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13646 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13652 \begin_inset space ~
13661 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13666 \begin_inset space \space{}
13674 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13678 \begin_inset space \space{}
13684 \begin_inset space ~
13692 \begin_inset space ~
13702 but you can also select your own.
13703 \begin_inset Newline newline
13706 The differences between roman,
13709 \begin_inset space ~
13718 fonts are explained in section
13719 \begin_inset space ~
13723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13725 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13730 \begin_inset Newline newline
13736 \begin_inset space ~
13741 was originally designed for newspapers.
13742 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13743 into the small newspaper columns.
13747 \begin_inset space ~
13752 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13755 \begin_layout Standard
13756 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13769 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13774 depends on the class you are using.
13775 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13778 \begin_layout Standard
13779 Note that the font size is the
13784 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13785 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13786 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13787 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13790 \begin_inset space ~
13796 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13797 \begin_inset space ~
13801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13803 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13810 \begin_layout Standard
13814 \begin_inset space ~
13819 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13821 \begin_inset space ~
13824 serif or typewriter.
13829 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13839 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13842 \begin_layout Standard
13847 LaTeX font encoding
13849 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13850 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13856 \begin_inset Index idx
13859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13867 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
13869 \begin_inset space ~
13873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13875 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13882 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13883 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13884 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
13888 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
13896 \begin_layout Standard
13897 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13899 Use Old Style Figures
13903 Use True Small Caps
13906 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13909 Use Old Style Figures
13911 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13913 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13921 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13925 Use True Small Caps
13927 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13928 of scaled capitals.
13929 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13930 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13931 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
13935 \begin_layout Standard
13937 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
13938 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
13939 provided by the font package (or the
13943 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
13948 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
13954 \begin_layout Standard
13959 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13960 a font to display the script characters.
13964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13965 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13971 \begin_inset Index idx
13974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13981 So this has no effect for the document language
13997 \begin_layout Standard
14000 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14002 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14003 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14009 \begin_inset Index idx
14012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14014 packages ! microtype
14023 \begin_layout Standard
14026 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14028 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14033 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14034 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14040 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14041 \begin_inset space ~
14045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14047 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14057 \begin_layout Standard
14058 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14062 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14070 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14075 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14076 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14078 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14080 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14083 dialog, see section
14084 \begin_inset space ~
14088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14090 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14102 \begin_layout Subsection
14106 \begin_layout Standard
14107 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14108 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14110 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14111 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14112 choose a math font in the dialog
14114 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14118 \begin_inset Index idx
14121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14122 Document ! Settings
14128 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14129 automatically selects a math font.
14130 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14131 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14140 \begin_inset space ~
14146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14151 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14152 document font is available.
14155 \begin_layout Standard
14156 Note that the math font will not be used for
14160 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14166 or by the insertion of the command
14173 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14174 \begin_inset space ~
14178 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14179 while the math characters do not.
14181 \begin_inset space ~
14184 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14187 \begin_inset space ~
14195 \begin_inset space ~
14200 in the document font settings.
14203 \begin_layout Standard
14204 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14205 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14206 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14207 font (in most cases
14208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14214 \begin_inset space ~
14220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14223 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14224 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14232 \begin_inset space ~
14238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14244 \begin_layout Subsection
14246 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14248 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14252 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14256 name "subsec:charstyles"
14263 \begin_inset Index idx
14266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14273 \begin_inset Index idx
14276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14285 \begin_layout Standard
14286 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14287 automatically changes the
14288 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14291 style for certain paragraph environments.
14293 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14294 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14296 This is where we meet the concept of
14302 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14304 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14308 \begin_layout Standard
14310 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14315 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14317 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14330 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14339 e., available with all document classes.
14340 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14344 for specific purposes.
14345 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14348 \begin_layout Standard
14350 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14351 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14361 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14365 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14378 — you customized the
14383 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14384 among them, encourage the use of
14396 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14397 \begin_inset space ~
14401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14403 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14408 Rather than fiddling with
14412 , they encourage the use of
14416 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14421 \begin_inset Quotes els
14425 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14428 ), not their form (
14429 \begin_inset Quotes els
14433 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14437 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14438 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14439 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14440 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14441 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14442 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14448 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14452 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14453 With a semantic markup (such as
14457 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14462 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14464 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14465 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14468 \begin_layout Standard
14470 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14471 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14472 by \SpecialChar LyX
14478 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14480 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14481 Builtin Text Styles
14482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14484 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14491 \begin_layout Standard
14493 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14494 The two builtin text styles can be
14495 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14499 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14503 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14504 both of these styles
14507 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14515 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14521 \begin_layout Standard
14526 style, do one of the following:
14529 \begin_layout Itemize
14530 click on the toolbar button
14539 \begin_layout Itemize
14540 use the key binding
14547 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14551 \begin_layout Itemize
14553 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14561 arg "dialog-show character"
14567 arg "dialog-show character"
14570 ) as described in section
14571 \begin_inset space ~
14575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14577 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14586 \begin_layout Standard
14587 These commands are all toggles.
14592 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14595 \begin_layout Standard
14596 One typically uses the
14600 style for proper names.
14602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14609 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14615 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14619 \begin_layout Standard
14621 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14626 is producing text in
14630 , but the definition can be changed.
14635 \begin_layout Standard
14637 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14639 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14647 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14654 \begin_layout Itemize
14655 clicking on the toolbar button
14664 \begin_layout Itemize
14665 using the keybindings
14672 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
14676 \begin_layout Itemize
14678 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
14686 arg "dialog-show character"
14692 arg "dialog-show character"
14695 ) as described in section
14696 \begin_inset space ~
14700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14702 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14711 \begin_layout Standard
14716 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14718 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
14720 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
14723 packages use a different font
14724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
14725 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14731 \begin_layout Standard
14732 We've been using the
14736 style all over the place in this document.
14737 Here's one more example:
14740 \begin_layout Quotation
14744 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
14746 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
14752 \begin_layout Standard
14753 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
14754 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
14755 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
14756 the common tendency to overuse
14757 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
14759 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
14764 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
14766 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
14770 \begin_layout Standard
14772 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
14773 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
14774 only as font changes and integrated in the
14782 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
14785 always reset to the default font using the key binding
14792 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
14794 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
14798 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
14801 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14803 \begin_inset space ~
14806 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14808 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598544
14814 arg "dialog-show character"
14820 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
14822 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
14828 arg "dialog-show character"
14832 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596575
14836 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14838 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
14840 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14842 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
14849 \begin_layout Standard
14851 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
14852 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
14854 \begin_inset space ~
14858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14860 reference "subsec:Modules"
14867 ), or local layout settings (see section
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14874 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
14879 As the two builtin styles, they provide
14883 markup for specific functions.
14884 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
14889 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
14899 \begin_inset Quotes els
14903 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14909 \begin_layout Standard
14911 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
14912 These styles can be found, if available, in the
14914 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14920 \begin_layout Standard
14922 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
14923 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
14928 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
14929 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
14930 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
14935 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
14936 \begin_inset Flex Emph
14939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14941 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
14949 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
14950 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
14951 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
14952 \begin_inset Flex Code
14955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14957 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
14966 \begin_inset Flex Strong
14969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14971 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
14980 \begin_inset Flex Noun
14983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14985 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
14994 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
14995 on screen their formal appearance.
15000 \begin_layout Subsection
15002 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15004 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15008 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15014 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15016 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15022 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15024 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15030 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15035 \begin_inset Index idx
15038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15047 \begin_layout Standard
15048 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15049 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15052 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15054 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15056 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15060 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15061 the properties of text passages
15062 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15066 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15067 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15068 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15069 from ordinary dialog.
15070 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15074 \begin_layout Standard
15076 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15077 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15078 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15079 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15080 the properties of the respective text passages.
15085 comes in as a last resort.
15090 \begin_layout Standard
15091 Before we document how to
15092 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15093 use custom character style
15094 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15095 tweak the text properties
15097 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15098 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15100 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15104 \begin_inset Newline newline
15107 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15108 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15111 \begin_layout Standard
15113 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15114 use custom character styles
15115 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15116 tweak text properties
15119 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15122 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15124 \begin_inset space ~
15127 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15129 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599762
15135 arg "dialog-show character"
15140 dialog or press the toolbar button
15143 arg "dialog-show character"
15148 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15151 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15152 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15154 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15157 property that you can choose.
15158 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15161 \begin_inset space ~
15166 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15168 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15172 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15174 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15179 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15180 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15181 environments all at once.
15184 \begin_layout Standard
15186 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15188 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15191 properties, and their options (in addition to
15194 \begin_inset space ~
15200 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15204 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15212 \begin_layout Labeling
15213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15227 The possible options are:
15231 \begin_layout Labeling
15232 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15237 This is the Roman font family.
15238 Normally a serif font.
15239 It's also the default family.
15249 \begin_layout Labeling
15250 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15254 \begin_inset space ~
15261 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15273 \begin_layout Labeling
15274 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15281 This is the Typewriter font family.
15287 arg "font-typewriter"
15293 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15297 \begin_layout Standard
15299 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15300 The general differences of these families are:
15303 \begin_layout Itemize
15305 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15310 fonts use characters with serifs.
15311 These are the small
15312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15319 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15320 The following example shows the difference:
15321 \begin_inset Newline newline
15325 \begin_inset Newline newline
15330 text without serifs
15333 \begin_inset Newline newline
15336 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15337 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15344 \begin_layout Itemize
15346 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15351 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15352 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15353 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15356 \begin_layout Itemize
15358 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15371 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15389 \begin_inset Newline newline
15393 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15398 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15411 \begin_inset Note Note
15414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15416 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15417 For more on phantoms see section
15418 \begin_inset space ~
15422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15424 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15434 \begin_inset Newline newline
15443 \begin_layout Labeling
15444 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15449 This corresponds to the print weight.
15454 \begin_layout Labeling
15455 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15460 This is the Medium font series.
15461 It's also the default series.
15464 \begin_layout Labeling
15465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15472 This is the Bold font series.
15485 \begin_layout Labeling
15486 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15491 As the name implies.
15496 \begin_layout Labeling
15497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15502 This is the Upright font shape.
15503 It's also the default shape.
15506 \begin_layout Labeling
15507 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15517 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15522 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15527 s the Italic font shape
15533 \begin_layout Labeling
15534 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15541 This is the Slanted font shape
15543 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15544 , this is different from italic).
15547 \begin_layout Labeling
15548 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15552 \begin_inset space ~
15559 This is the Small caps font shape
15566 \begin_layout Labeling
15567 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15572 Alters the text color.
15573 Note that not all DVI
15574 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599925
15576 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15579 viewers are able to display colors.
15581 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599934
15585 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15587 \begin_inset space ~
15594 , which means that the document default color set in
15596 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15597 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15603 \begin_inset space ~
15609 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599960
15615 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15695 \begin_inset Index idx
15698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15705 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
15711 \begin_layout Labeling
15712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15717 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
15718 the language of the document.
15719 Text marked in this way will be underlined
15720 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600006
15721 in the \SpecialChar LyX
15724 in blue to indicate the change
15725 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
15726 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15730 \begin_inset Newline newline
15733 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15735 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15736 When using the spell checking (see section
15737 \begin_inset space ~
15741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15743 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15747 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15748 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
15750 \begin_inset Newline newline
15753 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
15755 Exclude from Spellchecking
15758 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
15761 \begin_layout Labeling
15762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15767 Alters the size of the font.
15769 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
15771 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
15775 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
15778 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
15779 document font size.
15780 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15781 the details, but a general description of what
15787 \begin_layout Labeling
15788 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15809 arg "font-size tiny"
15815 \begin_layout Labeling
15816 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15837 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15843 \begin_layout Labeling
15844 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15865 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15871 \begin_layout Labeling
15872 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15884 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15893 arg "font-size small"
15899 \begin_layout Labeling
15900 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15914 It's also the default size.
15918 arg "font-size normal"
15924 \begin_layout Labeling
15925 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15933 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15937 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15946 arg "font-size large"
15952 \begin_layout Labeling
15953 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15974 arg "font-size larger"
15980 \begin_layout Labeling
15981 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16002 arg "font-size largest"
16008 \begin_layout Labeling
16009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16030 arg "font-size huge"
16036 \begin_layout Labeling
16037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16058 arg "font-size giant"
16064 \begin_layout Labeling
16065 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16070 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16090 arg "font-size increase"
16096 \begin_layout Labeling
16097 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16102 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16122 arg "font-size decrease"
16129 \begin_layout Standard
16134 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16135 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16137 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16138 — use those instead.
16139 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16142 \begin_layout Labeling
16143 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16145 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16149 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16155 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16156 change a few other things at the character level
16157 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16158 have text passages being underlined
16162 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16163 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16164 days, when you could not change fonts.
16165 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16166 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16167 because some people
16171 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16178 \begin_layout Labeling
16179 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16181 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16188 This is text with emphasize on
16191 This might seem like the same as
16195 , but it is actually a bit different.
16201 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16203 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16204 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16208 \begin_layout Labeling
16209 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16211 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16216 Don't use underlining.
16221 \begin_layout Labeling
16222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16224 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16228 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16236 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16238 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16247 arg "font-underline"
16253 \begin_inset Newline newline
16257 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16260 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16261 when you could not change fonts.
16262 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16263 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16264 because some people
16268 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16273 \begin_layout Labeling
16274 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16278 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16280 \begin_inset space ~
16289 This is text with Double under
16290 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16292 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16301 arg "font-underunderline"
16305 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16307 \begin_inset Newline newline
16310 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16311 about double underbar
16316 \begin_layout Labeling
16317 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16321 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16323 \begin_inset space ~
16332 This is text with Wavy under
16333 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16335 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16344 arg "font-underwave"
16348 \begin_inset Newline newline
16351 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16352 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16353 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16358 \begin_layout Labeling
16359 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16361 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16366 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16372 \begin_layout Labeling
16373 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16375 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16380 Don't use strikethrough.
16383 \begin_layout Labeling
16384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16388 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16390 \begin_inset space ~
16394 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16402 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16404 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16405 Single strikethrough
16413 arg "font-strikeout"
16417 \begin_inset Newline newline
16420 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16421 changed in the meantime.
16424 \begin_layout Labeling
16425 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16427 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16431 \begin_inset space ~
16435 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16437 \begin_inset space ~
16441 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16449 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16451 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16457 \begin_inset Newline newline
16460 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16464 \begin_layout Standard
16466 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
16467 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
16468 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
16469 \begin_inset space ~
16473 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16475 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16482 \begin_layout Itemize
16484 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
16491 This is text with emphasize on
16496 \begin_layout Itemize
16500 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
16507 This is text with Noun on.
16509 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
16516 , this is a logical attribute.
16517 Normally it's equivalent to
16520 \begin_inset space ~
16530 \begin_layout Standard
16531 So you have a huge number of combinations to
16532 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
16534 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
16539 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
16540 chosen a new character style
16541 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
16542 applied a text property
16545 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
16548 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16550 \begin_inset space ~
16553 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16555 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600703
16561 arg "dialog-show character"
16569 arg "dialog-show character"
16572 ) dialog, the settings are
16573 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
16577 You can activate the
16578 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
16580 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
16581 last applied properties
16583 by using the toolbar button
16586 arg "textstyle-apply"
16590 The button lets you apply
16591 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
16592 your custom character style
16593 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
16596 even when the dialog isn't visible.
16598 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
16599 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
16600 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
16601 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
16606 \begin_layout Standard
16607 To completely reset the
16608 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
16610 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
16611 text properties of a selection
16613 to the default, use
16614 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
16616 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
16626 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
16631 from the menu of the toolbar button
16634 arg "textstyle-apply"
16641 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
16642 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
16643 you just set the shape to
16644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16662 \begin_inset space ~
16676 \begin_layout Standard
16678 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16679 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
16687 \begin_inset space ~
16699 \begin_layout Itemize
16701 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16714 font, which means every character has the same width; the
16715 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16732 \begin_inset Newline newline
16736 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16750 \begin_inset Note Note
16753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16754 For more on phantoms see section
16755 \begin_inset space ~
16759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16761 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16771 \begin_inset Newline newline
16777 \begin_layout Itemize
16779 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16784 fonts use characters with serifs.
16785 These are the small
16786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16793 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16794 The following example shows the difference:
16795 \begin_inset Newline newline
16799 \begin_inset Newline newline
16804 text without serifs
16807 \begin_inset Newline newline
16810 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16811 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16818 \begin_layout Itemize
16820 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
16825 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16826 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16827 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16832 \begin_layout Standard
16834 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
16835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16842 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16843 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16846 \begin_inset space ~
16851 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
16852 the property to be removed.
16853 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
16854 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
16855 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
16858 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16873 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16874 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16882 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
16886 \begin_inset space ~
16891 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
16894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16902 If you, for example, set
16903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16911 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16915 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16921 \begin_inset space ~
16926 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
16928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16935 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
16940 \begin_layout Standard
16942 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
16945 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
16946 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16949 \begin_layout Section
16950 Printing and Previewing
16953 \begin_layout Subsection
16957 \begin_layout Standard
16958 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
16959 using \SpecialChar LyX
16960 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16961 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
16962 goes on behind-the-scenes.
16963 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16965 Additional Features
16970 \begin_layout Standard
16972 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16975 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16976 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
16977 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16980 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16981 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
16982 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16983 to turn your writing into printable output.
16984 This happens in two stages:
16987 \begin_layout Enumerate
16988 First, \SpecialChar LyX
16989 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16991 a file with the extension,
16992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17006 \begin_layout Enumerate
17007 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17008 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17009 to use the commands in the
17013 file to produce printable output.
17016 \begin_layout Subsection
17017 Output file formats
17018 \begin_inset Index idx
17021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17030 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17037 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17039 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17041 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17045 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17049 \begin_inset Index idx
17052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17054 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17056 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17067 \begin_layout Standard
17068 This file type has the extension
17069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17081 It contains your document as plain text
17082 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17084 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17085 following the rules of the
17086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17089 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17098 \begin_layout Standard
17099 You can export your document to
17100 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17102 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17107 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17108 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17110 \begin_inset space ~
17116 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17117 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17118 bibliography (section
17119 \begin_inset space ~
17123 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17125 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17130 If your document includes such material, use
17132 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17133 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17135 \begin_inset space ~
17139 \begin_inset space ~
17143 \begin_inset space ~
17151 \begin_inset space ~
17155 \begin_inset space ~
17161 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17162 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17163 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17165 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17174 \begin_inset Index idx
17177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17178 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17187 \begin_layout Standard
17188 This file type has the extension
17189 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17200 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17203 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17204 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17205 -Errors or to process it manually
17206 with console commands.
17207 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17208 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17209 's temporary directory whenever you
17210 view or export your document.
17213 \begin_layout Standard
17214 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17215 -file using the menu
17217 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17218 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17222 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17223 export variants are explained in section
17224 \begin_inset space ~
17228 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17230 reference "subsec:Export"
17237 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17239 \begin_inset Index idx
17242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17251 \begin_layout Standard
17252 This file type has the extension
17253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17266 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17273 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17274 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17275 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17279 \begin_layout Standard
17280 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17281 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17282 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17283 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17284 when you view the DVI.
17285 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17288 \begin_layout Standard
17289 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17291 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17292 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17297 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17298 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17300 \begin_inset space ~
17306 The latter option uses the program
17308 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17314 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17317 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17318 font access (see section
17319 \begin_inset space ~
17323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17325 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17330 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17331 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17336 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17338 \begin_inset Index idx
17341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17342 File formats ! PostScript
17350 \begin_layout Standard
17351 This file type has the extension
17352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17364 PostScript was developed by the company
17368 as a printer language.
17369 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17371 PostScript can be seen as a
17372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17375 programming language
17376 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17379 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17384 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17391 \begin_inset Index idx
17394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17396 packages ! pstricks
17406 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17409 \begin_layout Standard
17410 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17414 Encapsulated PostScript
17415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17418 (EPS, file extension
17419 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17431 As \SpecialChar LyX
17432 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17433 convert them in the background to EPS.
17434 If, for example, you have 50
17435 \begin_inset space ~
17438 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
17440 \begin_inset space ~
17443 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17444 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17446 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
17447 EPS to avoid this problem.
17450 \begin_layout Standard
17451 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17453 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17454 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17460 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17462 \begin_inset Index idx
17465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17472 \begin_inset Index idx
17475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17484 \begin_layout Standard
17485 This file type has the extension
17486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17499 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17502 Portable Document Format
17503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17510 was derived from PostScript.
17511 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17513 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17517 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17520 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
17521 looks exactly the same.
17524 \begin_layout Standard
17525 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17529 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17533 (JPG, file extension
17534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17554 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17561 Portable Network Graphics
17562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17565 (PNG, file extension
17566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17578 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
17579 converts them in the
17580 background to one of these formats.
17581 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
17582 will slow down your workflow.
17583 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17586 \begin_layout Standard
17587 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
17589 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17595 \begin_layout Description
17597 \begin_inset space ~
17600 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17604 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17607 \begin_layout Description
17609 \begin_inset space ~
17616 ) This uses the program
17618 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17621 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17624 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17627 is a new engine, derived from
17631 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
17632 access (see section
17633 \begin_inset space ~
17637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17639 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17644 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17645 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17650 \begin_layout Description
17652 \begin_inset space ~
17659 ) This uses the program
17664 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17670 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17671 font access (see section
17672 \begin_inset space ~
17676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17678 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17683 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
17684 vertically written Japanese.
17687 \begin_layout Description
17689 \begin_inset space ~
17692 (cropped) This is the same as
17695 \begin_inset space ~
17700 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17701 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17702 to generate good-looking
17703 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17706 \begin_layout Description
17708 \begin_inset space ~
17711 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17715 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
17719 \begin_layout Description
17721 \begin_inset space ~
17724 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17728 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17729 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17733 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17734 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17737 \begin_layout Standard
17741 \begin_inset space ~
17750 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
17751 works without problems.
17752 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17753 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
17757 \begin_inset space ~
17765 \begin_inset space ~
17770 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
17778 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17780 \begin_inset Index idx
17783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17784 FileFormats ! XHTML
17790 \begin_inset Index idx
17793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17802 \begin_layout Standard
17803 This file type has the extension
17804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17816 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17817 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17818 When \SpecialChar LyX
17819 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
17820 suitable for the purpose.
17821 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17823 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17824 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17827 between different formats, which are described in section
17829 Math Output in XHTML
17834 \begin_inset space ~
17842 \begin_layout Standard
17843 XHTML output remains
17844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17851 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17852 features are supported yet.
17856 and the World Wide Web
17860 Additional Features
17862 manual, for more information.
17865 \begin_layout Standard
17866 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17868 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17869 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17875 \begin_layout Subsection
17877 \begin_inset Index idx
17880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17889 \begin_layout Standard
17890 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
17891 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
17900 or use the toolbar button
17907 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
17908 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17909 \begin_inset space ~
17913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17915 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17919 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
17921 \begin_inset space ~
17925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17927 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17932 Further output formats can be selected via
17934 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17935 View (Other Formats)
17937 or the toolbar button
17946 \begin_layout Standard
17947 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
17948 viewer window using the menu
17950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17955 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17956 Update (Other Formats)
17961 \begin_layout Standard
17962 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17965 To have a real output, export your document.
17968 \begin_layout Section
17969 A few Words about Typography
17970 \begin_inset Index idx
17973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17982 \begin_layout Subsection
17983 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
17984 \begin_inset Index idx
17987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17994 \begin_inset Index idx
17997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18006 \begin_layout Standard
18007 In \SpecialChar LyX
18009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18020 symbol comes in four variants: the
18037 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18043 \begin_layout Standard
18044 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18054 height_special "totalheight"
18059 backgroundcolor "none"
18062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18063 \begin_inset Tabular
18064 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18065 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18066 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18067 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18068 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18069 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18070 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18098 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18099 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18138 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18139 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18161 system key combination
18165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18166 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18178 and the em dash with
18181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18185 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18194 is the Mac label for the right
18204 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18217 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18218 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18240 system key combination or
18241 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18245 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18255 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18268 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18307 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18313 \begin_layout Standard
18314 Dashes can also be inserted with
18316 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18318 \begin_inset space ~
18321 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18329 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18330 and 2014 for the en dash).
18333 \begin_layout Standard
18334 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18335 mode and has a length of its own.
18336 Here are some examples:
18339 \begin_layout Enumerate
18340 line- and page-breaks
18341 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18351 \begin_layout Enumerate
18353 \begin_inset space ~
18357 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18367 \begin_layout Enumerate
18368 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18369 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18379 \begin_layout Enumerate
18380 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18384 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18394 \begin_layout Standard
18396 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18398 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18399 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18407 \begin_layout Subsection
18408 Dashes and Line Breaks
18409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18411 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18418 \begin_layout Standard
18419 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18420 case and locale, e.
18421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18427 \begin_layout Itemize
18428 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18429 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18432 \begin_layout Itemize
18433 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18437 \begin_layout Itemize
18438 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
18439 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18442 \begin_layout Standard
18443 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18444 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18455 allows line breaks after hyphens
18456 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
18458 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
18461 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18464 \begin_layout Enumerate
18465 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18466 \begin_inset space ~
18469 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18471 The Elements of Typographic Style
18474 \begin_inset space ~
18477 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18480 \begin_layout Enumerate
18481 Unwanted line breaks
18486 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
18488 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
18491 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18498 Prevent Hyphenation
18503 \begin_inset space ~
18519 in \SpecialChar TeX
18521 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
18522 , a protected space does not suffice
18526 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
18531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18533 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
18534 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
18535 in the document language.
18536 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
18550 \begin_layout Itemize
18552 \begin_inset space ~
18556 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18566 height_special "totalheight"
18571 backgroundcolor "none"
18574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18583 \begin_layout Itemize
18585 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18595 height_special "totalheight"
18600 backgroundcolor "none"
18603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18605 \begin_inset space ~
18613 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18614 \begin_inset space ~
18617 – sont très utiles.
18620 \begin_layout Itemize
18625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18634 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
18638 \begin_layout Standard
18639 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18640 \begin_inset space ~
18643 – in contrast to an overfull line
18644 \begin_inset space ~
18647 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18651 \begin_layout Standard
18652 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
18655 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18656 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18657 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18658 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18663 \begin_layout Enumerate
18664 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18665 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
18666 or \SpecialChar TeX
18672 \begin_layout Itemize
18674 \begin_inset space ~
18677 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18678 \begin_inset space ~
18681 – sont très utiles.
18685 \begin_layout Enumerate
18686 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18687 \begin_inset Newline newline
18692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18693 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18695 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
18697 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
18699 \begin_inset space ~
18705 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
18707 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
18709 \begin_inset space ~
18720 \begin_layout Itemize
18721 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18722 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
18723 should be followed by
18724 a line break opportunity.
18727 \begin_layout Standard
18728 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18729 \begin_inset space ~
18733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18735 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18746 \begin_layout Enumerate
18747 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18748 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
18749 or en dashes (see section
18750 \begin_inset space ~
18754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18756 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18766 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18767 Changes and backwards compatibility
18770 \begin_layout Standard
18771 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18773 \begin_inset space ~
18776 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
18777 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18786 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
18787 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18795 \begin_layout Standard
18796 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18798 \begin_inset space ~
18801 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18803 prevents ligation to dashes.
18805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18812 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
18817 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
18818 after the input (unless the current text font is
18826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18827 The behavior was changed since
18828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18843 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
18844 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
18845 as non-breakable dashes.
18846 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18854 \begin_layout Standard
18857 \begin_inset space ~
18865 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18867 \begin_inset space ~
18870 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18873 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18874 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18875 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18876 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18878 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18882 If you used both literal and
18883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18890 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18892 \begin_inset space ~
18895 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
18896 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18899 \begin_layout Subsection
18901 \begin_inset Index idx
18904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18911 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18913 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18920 \begin_layout Standard
18921 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18922 but automatically in the output.
18923 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18929 \begin_inset Index idx
18932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18939 following the rules of the document language.
18941 does not hyphenate text in the
18945 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18948 \begin_layout Standard
18950 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
18954 font and with unusual constructs, like
18955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18963 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18964 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
18965 This is done with the menu
18967 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18968 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18970 \begin_inset space ~
18976 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18978 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
18982 \begin_layout Standard
18983 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18984 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
18986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18995 would then see the hyphen
18996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19003 as a line break possibility.
19004 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19005 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19009 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19012 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19014 Prevent Hyphenation
19019 \begin_inset space ~
19027 \begin_layout Subsection
19029 \begin_inset Index idx
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19041 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19042 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19045 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19052 \begin_layout Standard
19053 When \SpecialChar LyX
19054 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19055 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19057 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19063 appropriate amount of space.
19064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19067 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19069 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19070 gets after another word.
19073 \begin_layout Standard
19074 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19075 not work in all cases.
19077 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19085 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19088 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19089 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19092 \begin_layout Standard
19093 Here are some examples of
19097 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19100 \begin_layout Itemize
19105 \begin_layout Itemize
19110 \begin_layout Standard
19111 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19114 \begin_layout Itemize
19116 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19120 this is too much space!
19123 \begin_layout Itemize
19128 \begin_layout Standard
19129 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19132 \begin_layout Standard
19133 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19136 \begin_layout Enumerate
19140 \begin_inset space ~
19145 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19146 \begin_inset space ~
19150 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19152 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19157 \begin_inset Index idx
19160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19161 Spaces ! inter-word
19169 \begin_layout Enumerate
19173 \begin_inset space ~
19178 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19179 \begin_inset space ~
19183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19185 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19190 \begin_inset Index idx
19193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19202 \begin_layout Enumerate
19206 \begin_inset space ~
19210 \begin_inset space ~
19214 \begin_inset space ~
19221 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19223 \begin_inset space ~
19228 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19229 This function is also bound to
19232 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19238 \begin_layout Standard
19239 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19242 \begin_layout Itemize
19244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19248 \begin_inset space \space{}
19251 this is too much space!
19254 \begin_layout Itemize
19255 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19259 \begin_layout Standard
19260 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19261 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19263 will take care of this.
19266 \begin_layout Standard
19267 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19271 \begin_inset space ~
19277 feature described in the section
19279 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19284 Additional Features
19289 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19291 \begin_inset Index idx
19294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19295 Typography ! Quotation marks
19301 \begin_inset Index idx
19304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19305 Quotation marks | see
19309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19335 \begin_layout Standard
19337 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19338 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19339 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19349 The keyboard character,
19353 , generates this automatically.
19356 \begin_layout Standard
19357 You can specify what character the
19361 key produces by using the submenu
19367 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19371 \begin_inset Index idx
19374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19375 Document ! Settings
19380 dialog and switching the
19384 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19385 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19387 \begin_inset space ~
19393 \begin_layout Labeling
19394 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19406 \begin_inset space ~
19410 \begin_inset space ~
19414 \begin_inset Quotes els
19418 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19432 \begin_inset Quotes els
19436 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19439 quotation marks (as common, e.
19440 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19446 \begin_layout Labeling
19447 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19450 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19454 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19458 \begin_inset space ~
19462 \begin_inset space ~
19466 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19470 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19476 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19480 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19484 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19488 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19491 quotation marks (as common, e.
19492 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19498 \begin_layout Labeling
19499 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19502 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19506 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19510 \begin_inset space ~
19514 \begin_inset space ~
19518 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19522 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19528 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19532 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19536 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19540 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19543 quotation marks (as common, e.
19544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19550 \begin_layout Labeling
19551 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19554 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19558 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19562 \begin_inset space ~
19566 \begin_inset space ~
19570 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19574 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19580 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19584 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19588 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19592 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19595 quotation marks (as common, e.
19596 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19602 \begin_layout Labeling
19603 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19606 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19610 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19614 \begin_inset space ~
19618 \begin_inset space ~
19622 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19626 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19632 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19636 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19640 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19644 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19647 quotation marks (as common, e.
19648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19651 g., in Switzerland)
19654 \begin_layout Labeling
19655 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19658 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19662 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19666 \begin_inset space ~
19670 \begin_inset space ~
19674 \begin_inset Quotes als
19678 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19684 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19688 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19692 \begin_inset Quotes als
19696 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19699 quotation marks (as common, e.
19700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19706 \begin_layout Labeling
19707 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19710 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19714 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19718 \begin_inset space ~
19722 \begin_inset space ~
19726 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19730 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19736 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19740 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19744 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19748 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19751 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19754 \begin_layout Labeling
19755 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19758 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19762 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19766 \begin_inset space ~
19770 \begin_inset space ~
19774 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19778 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19784 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19788 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19792 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19796 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19799 quotation marks (as common, e.
19800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19803 g., in Great Britain)
19806 \begin_layout Labeling
19807 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19810 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19814 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19818 \begin_inset space ~
19822 \begin_inset space ~
19826 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19830 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19836 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19840 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19844 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19848 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19851 quotation marks (as common, e.
19852 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19858 \begin_layout Labeling
19859 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19862 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19866 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19870 \begin_inset space ~
19874 \begin_inset space ~
19878 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19882 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19888 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19892 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19896 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19900 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19903 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19908 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19909 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19910 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
19911 the inner marks differ).
19919 \begin_layout Labeling
19920 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19923 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19927 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19931 \begin_inset space ~
19935 \begin_inset space ~
19939 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19943 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19949 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19953 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19957 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19961 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19964 quotation marks (as common, e.
19965 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19971 \begin_layout Labeling
19972 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19975 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19979 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19983 \begin_inset space ~
19987 \begin_inset space ~
19991 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19995 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20001 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20005 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20009 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20013 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20016 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20019 \begin_layout Labeling
20020 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20021 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20029 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20035 \begin_inset space ~
20039 \begin_inset space ~
20045 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20053 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20057 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20061 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20065 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20069 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20072 quotation marks (as common, e.
20073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20082 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20085 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20091 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20092 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20100 \begin_layout Labeling
20101 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20102 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20110 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20116 \begin_inset space ~
20120 \begin_inset space ~
20126 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20134 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20138 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20142 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20146 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20150 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20153 quotation marks (as common, e.
20154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20157 g., in North Korea and China)
20158 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20160 \begin_inset script superscript
20162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20164 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20167 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20182 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20188 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20189 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20199 \begin_layout Standard
20200 Inner quotation marks
20204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20205 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20206 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20207 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20215 does not necessarily mean
20216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20224 This is why we call them
20225 \begin_inset Quotes els
20229 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20245 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20247 \begin_inset Quotes els
20251 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20254 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20257 arg "quote-insert inner"
20262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20268 \begin_layout Standard
20269 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20270 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20271 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20272 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20273 If you check the setting
20275 Use dynamic quotation marks
20279 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20280 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20283 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20284 they appear in a special color).
20285 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20286 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20288 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20291 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20294 \begin_layout Standard
20295 Individual quotation marks (i.
20296 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20299 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20300 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20304 \begin_layout Subsection
20306 \begin_inset Index idx
20309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20310 Typography ! Ligatures
20316 \begin_inset Index idx
20319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20348 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20350 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20357 \begin_layout Standard
20358 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20359 print them as single characters.
20360 These groups are known as
20365 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20366 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
20368 Here are the standard ligatures:
20371 \begin_layout Itemize
20375 \begin_layout Itemize
20379 \begin_layout Itemize
20383 \begin_layout Itemize
20387 \begin_layout Itemize
20391 \begin_layout Standard
20392 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20395 \begin_layout Standard
20396 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
20397 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20405 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
20406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20421 To break a ligature, use
20423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20424 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20426 \begin_inset space ~
20433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20444 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20461 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20469 \begin_layout Subsection
20471 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
20473 \begin_inset Index idx
20476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20486 \begin_layout Standard
20489 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20490 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20494 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20497 \begin_layout Description
20499 The name of the game.
20502 \begin_layout Description
20504 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
20508 \begin_layout Description
20510 The \SpecialChar TeX
20511 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20515 \begin_layout Description
20516 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20517 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20521 \begin_layout Standard
20522 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20528 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20532 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20536 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20537 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20538 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20539 converges to the number
20540 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20543 : The actual version is
20544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20552 , the previous one was
20553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20558 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20564 \begin_layout Subsection
20566 \begin_inset Index idx
20569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20578 \begin_layout Standard
20579 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
20580 space between two words.
20581 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
20584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20591 for units use the menu
20593 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20594 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20596 \begin_inset space ~
20604 arg "space-insert thin"
20610 \begin_layout Standard
20611 Here is an example to show the differences:
20614 \begin_layout Standard
20615 \begin_inset Tabular
20616 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20617 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20618 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20619 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20621 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 \begin_inset space ~
20630 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20642 space between number and unit
20649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20658 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20670 half space between number and unit
20683 \begin_layout Subsection
20685 \begin_inset Index idx
20688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20689 Typography ! Widows and orphans
20697 \begin_layout Standard
20698 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
20700 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20701 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
20702 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
20703 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20704 These bits of text became known as
20715 \begin_layout Standard
20716 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
20717 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20718 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20719 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
20720 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
20721 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20722 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
20723 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
20724 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
20725 \begin_inset Newline newline
20733 \begin_inset Newline newline
20741 \begin_inset Newline newline
20744 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20745 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20746 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20748 \begin_inset space ~
20752 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20754 key "latexcompanion"
20760 \begin_inset space ~
20764 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20771 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20772 's page break mechanism.
20775 \begin_layout Chapter
20776 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
20777 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20779 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20786 \begin_layout Standard
20787 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20790 \begin_inset space ~
20796 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20799 \begin_layout Section
20801 \begin_inset Index idx
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20811 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20820 \begin_layout Standard
20822 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20825 \begin_layout Description
20828 \begin_inset space ~
20831 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20832 \begin_inset Newline newline
20836 \begin_inset Note Note
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20840 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20848 \begin_layout Description
20849 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
20850 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20851 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20854 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20855 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20857 \begin_inset space ~
20863 \begin_inset Newline newline
20867 \begin_inset Note Comment
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20871 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20880 \begin_layout Description
20882 \begin_inset space ~
20885 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
20886 set in the document settings under
20888 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20890 \begin_inset space ~
20896 \begin_inset Newline newline
20900 \begin_inset Newline newline
20904 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20913 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20914 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20919 of a comment that appears in the output.
20925 \begin_inset Newline newline
20929 \begin_inset Newline newline
20932 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20935 \begin_layout Standard
20936 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20948 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20951 \begin_layout Section
20953 \begin_inset Index idx
20956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20965 name "sec:Footnotes"
20972 \begin_layout Standard
20974 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
20977 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20980 or the toolbar button
20983 arg "footnote-insert"
20995 \begin_inset Graphics
20996 filename clipart/footnote.png
21005 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21006 's representation of your footnote.
21016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21035 label, the box will
21039 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21040 Clicking on the box label again will close
21053 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21054 and click on the footnote
21069 \begin_layout Standard
21070 Here is an example footnote:
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21079 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21087 \begin_layout Standard
21088 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21089 position where the footnote box is placed.
21090 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21091 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21092 according to the document class.
21094 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21095 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21101 ey are described in the
21104 \begin_inset space ~
21112 \begin_layout Section
21114 \begin_inset Index idx
21117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21126 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21133 \begin_layout Standard
21134 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21136 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21140 \begin_inset space ~
21145 or the toolbar button
21148 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21174 appearing within your text.
21175 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21176 's representation of your margin
21185 \begin_layout Standard
21186 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21190 \begin_inset Marginal
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21195 This is a marginal note.
21203 \begin_layout Standard
21204 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21205 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21206 pages, right on odd pages.
21209 \begin_layout Standard
21210 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21213 \begin_inset space ~
21221 \begin_inset space ~
21229 \begin_layout Section
21230 Graphics and Images
21231 \begin_inset Index idx
21234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 \begin_inset Index idx
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21253 name "sec:Graphics"
21260 \begin_layout Standard
21261 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21262 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21265 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21270 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21274 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21277 \begin_layout Standard
21278 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21283 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21284 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21286 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21287 \begin_inset space ~
21291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21293 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21300 \begin_layout Standard
21305 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21306 of the image in the output.
21307 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21311 \begin_inset space ~
21315 \begin_inset space ~
21324 \begin_inset space ~
21328 \begin_inset space ~
21332 \begin_inset space ~
21337 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21338 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21346 \begin_layout Standard
21350 \begin_inset space ~
21354 \begin_inset space ~
21359 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21360 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21362 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21367 \begin_inset space ~
21372 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
21373 with the image size is printed.
21376 \begin_layout Standard
21377 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21378 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
21380 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
21383 \begin_layout Standard
21385 \begin_inset Graphics
21386 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21394 \begin_layout Standard
21395 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
21396 the image into a float, see section
21397 \begin_inset space ~
21401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21403 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21410 \begin_layout Subsection
21412 \begin_inset Index idx
21415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21424 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21431 \begin_layout Standard
21432 You can insert images in any known file format.
21433 But as we explained in section
21434 \begin_inset space ~
21438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21440 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21444 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21446 therefore uses the program
21450 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21451 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21452 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21453 \begin_inset space ~
21457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21459 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21466 \begin_layout Standard
21467 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21470 \begin_layout Description
21472 \begin_inset space ~
21475 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
21476 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21477 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21481 Graphics Interchange Format
21482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21485 (GIF, file extension
21486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21498 \begin_inset Index idx
21501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21533 Portable Network Graphics
21534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21537 (PNG, file extension
21538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21546 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21550 \begin_inset Index idx
21553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21585 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21589 (JPG, file extension
21590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21610 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21614 \begin_inset Index idx
21617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21648 \begin_layout Description
21650 \begin_inset space ~
21653 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
21655 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
21656 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21657 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21658 \begin_inset Newline newline
21661 Scalable image formats can be
21662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21665 Scalable Vector Graphics
21666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21669 (SVG, file extension
21670 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21678 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21682 \begin_inset Index idx
21685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21717 Encapsulated PostScript
21718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21721 (EPS, file extension
21722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21734 \begin_inset Index idx
21737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21769 Portable Document Format
21770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21773 (PDF, file extension
21774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21786 \begin_inset Index idx
21789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21804 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
21805 result will not be scalable.
21806 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
21811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21812 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
21820 \begin_layout Standard
21821 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
21828 \begin_layout Subsection
21829 Grouping of Image Settings
21830 \begin_inset Index idx
21833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21834 Images ! Settings grouping
21842 \begin_layout Standard
21843 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
21845 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
21846 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
21848 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
21849 need to manually change each of them.
21852 \begin_layout Standard
21853 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21856 \begin_inset space ~
21860 \begin_inset space ~
21872 \begin_inset space ~
21876 \begin_inset space ~
21882 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
21883 and checking the name of the desired group.
21886 \begin_layout Section
21888 \begin_inset Index idx
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21907 \begin_layout Standard
21908 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21911 arg "tabular-insert"
21916 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21920 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
21921 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
21922 , and you can select a specific (border) style
21925 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
21926 from the rest of the table.
21927 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
21928 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
21930 Here is an example table:
21933 \begin_layout Standard
21935 \begin_inset Tabular
21936 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21937 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21938 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21939 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21940 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21941 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21970 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22135 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22139 \begin_layout Standard
22141 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22142 This corresponds to the
22143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22150 table style listed in the style selection.
22153 \begin_layout Standard
22155 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22156 Other available styles include:
22159 \begin_layout Itemize
22161 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22170 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22174 \begin_layout Itemize
22176 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22177 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22180 \begin_layout Itemize
22182 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22191 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22192 bold top/bottom lines (see
22203 \begin_layout Standard
22205 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22206 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22207 button can be changed in
22209 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22210 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22214 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22218 \begin_layout Subsection
22222 \begin_layout Standard
22223 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22226 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22230 This brings up the table dialog.
22231 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22232 cursor is placed currently.
22233 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22234 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22235 done on all of your selection.
22238 \begin_layout Standard
22239 In addition to the table dialog, the
22242 \begin_inset space ~
22247 helps you in setting table properties.
22248 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22251 \begin_layout Standard
22255 \begin_inset space ~
22260 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22261 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22262 current cell respectively.
22263 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22265 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22266 of text, see section
22267 \begin_inset space ~
22271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22273 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22280 \begin_layout Standard
22281 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22282 using the check box
22291 This will merge the cells to
22295 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22296 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22297 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22298 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22299 in the last row without the upper border:
22302 \begin_layout Standard
22304 \begin_inset Tabular
22305 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22306 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22308 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22310 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22321 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22330 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22406 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22441 \begin_layout Standard
22442 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22443 -arguments for the table.
22444 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
22445 explained in the chapter
22452 \begin_inset space ~
22458 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22459 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22460 but are visible in the output.
22463 \begin_layout Standard
22464 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22472 Most DVI-viewers are
22476 able to display rotations.
22484 \begin_layout Standard
22489 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22494 adds lines for all cell borders.
22497 \begin_layout Subsection
22499 \begin_inset Index idx
22502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22503 Tables ! Multi-page
22509 \begin_inset Index idx
22512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22521 \begin_layout Standard
22522 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
22525 \begin_inset space ~
22529 \begin_inset space ~
22537 \begin_inset space ~
22542 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22543 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22546 \begin_layout Description
22551 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22552 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22553 Except for the first page, if
22556 \begin_inset space ~
22564 \begin_layout Description
22568 \begin_inset space ~
22573 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
22574 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22577 \begin_layout Description
22582 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22583 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22584 except for the last page, if
22587 \begin_inset space ~
22595 \begin_layout Description
22599 \begin_inset space ~
22604 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
22605 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22608 \begin_layout Description
22609 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
22610 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22612 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22616 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22619 \begin_inset space ~
22627 \begin_layout Standard
22628 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22629 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
22630 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
22636 In this context, first means first in this order:
22639 \begin_inset space ~
22651 \begin_inset space ~
22656 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
22659 \begin_layout Standard
22661 \begin_inset Tabular
22662 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22663 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22664 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22665 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22666 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22667 <row endfirsthead="true">
22668 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22674 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
22679 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22688 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22698 <row endfirsthead="true">
22699 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22710 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22719 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22731 <row endhead="true">
22732 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22743 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22752 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22762 <row endhead="true">
22763 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22783 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22795 <row endfoot="true">
22796 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22807 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22816 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23312 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23498 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23591 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23653 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23684 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23788 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23797 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23806 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23817 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23848 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23879 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23910 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23941 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23972 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24003 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24034 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24065 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24096 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24127 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24158 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24189 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24220 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24251 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24282 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24313 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24344 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24375 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24406 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24437 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24468 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24499 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24530 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24561 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24592 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24623 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24654 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24685 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24716 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24727 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24747 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24767 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24777 <row endlastfoot="true">
24778 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24789 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24798 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24815 \begin_layout Subsection
24817 \begin_inset Index idx
24820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24827 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24829 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24836 \begin_layout Standard
24837 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
24838 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24839 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24840 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24844 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24847 \begin_layout Standard
24848 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
24849 for the column in the table dialog.
24850 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
24851 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24855 \begin_layout Standard
24857 \begin_inset Tabular
24858 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24859 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24860 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24861 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24862 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24882 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24951 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25007 This is longer now.
25012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25063 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25064 This is longer now.
25069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25095 \begin_layout Standard
25096 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25097 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25102 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25103 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25108 Selection with the mouse or with
25112 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25113 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25114 the selection from outside the table.
25117 \begin_layout Section
25119 \begin_inset Index idx
25122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25138 \begin_layout Subsection
25142 \begin_layout Standard
25143 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25144 have a fixed location.
25146 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25150 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25153 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25161 \begin_inset space ~
25166 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25167 too many notes on the current page.
25170 \begin_layout Standard
25171 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25172 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25173 and pages without text.
25174 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25175 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25176 Floats are therefore numbered.
25177 Referencing is described in section
25178 \begin_inset space ~
25182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25184 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25191 \begin_layout Standard
25192 To insert a float, use the menu
25194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25198 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25199 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25201 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25202 \begin_inset Index idx
25205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25211 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25212 paragraph within the float.
25213 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25214 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25215 left-clicking on the box label.
25216 A closed float box looks like this:
25217 \begin_inset Graphics
25218 filename clipart/float.png
25223 – a gray button with a red label.
25226 \begin_layout Standard
25227 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25229 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25232 \begin_layout Subsection
25234 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25236 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25241 \begin_inset Index idx
25244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25245 Floats ! Figure floats
25253 \begin_layout Standard
25255 \begin_inset space ~
25259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25261 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25265 was created using the menu
25267 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25268 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25274 arg "float-insert figure"
25278 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25281 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25287 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25291 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25292 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25294 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25296 \begin_inset space ~
25304 arg "layout-paragraph"
25310 \begin_layout Standard
25311 \begin_inset Float figure
25318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 \begin_inset Graphics
25321 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25331 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25336 name "fig:A-star-in"
25353 \begin_layout Standard
25354 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25355 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25366 ) and refer to it using the menu
25368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25374 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25378 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
25379 vague references like
25380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25387 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25388 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
25390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25398 For more about cross-references, see section
25399 \begin_inset space ~
25403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25405 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25412 \begin_layout Standard
25413 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
25414 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25415 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25416 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
25417 as described in section
25418 \begin_inset space ~
25422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25424 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25430 \begin_inset space ~
25434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25436 reference "fig:Two-images"
25440 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25441 You can also set the images one below the other.
25443 \begin_inset space ~
25447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25449 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25456 reference "fig:Star"
25460 are the subfigures.
25463 \begin_layout Standard
25464 \begin_inset Float figure
25471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25472 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25476 \begin_inset Float figure
25483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25484 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25489 name "fig:Undefinable"
25501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25502 \begin_inset Graphics
25503 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25515 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25519 \begin_inset Float figure
25526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25527 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25545 \begin_inset Graphics
25546 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25558 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25565 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25568 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25570 name "fig:Two-images"
25587 \begin_layout Subsection
25589 \begin_inset Index idx
25592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25593 Floats ! Table floats
25601 \begin_layout Standard
25602 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
25604 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25605 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25608 or the toolbar button
25611 arg "float-insert table"
25615 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
25616 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
25617 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
25619 \begin_inset space ~
25623 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25625 reference "tab:Table-float"
25632 \begin_layout Standard
25633 \begin_inset Float table
25640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25641 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25644 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25646 name "tab:Table-float"
25658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25660 \begin_inset Tabular
25661 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25662 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25663 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25664 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25665 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25792 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25813 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25816 \end{array}\right]$
25824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25837 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25858 \begin_layout Subsection
25860 \begin_inset Index idx
25863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25872 \begin_layout Standard
25874 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25875 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
25876 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
25878 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25886 \begin_inset space ~
25894 \begin_layout Section
25896 \begin_inset Index idx
25899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25908 \begin_layout Standard
25910 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
25912 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
25913 \begin_inset space \space{}
25919 \begin_layout Standard
25920 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25921 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25923 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25927 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
25928 and its alignment within the page.
25931 \begin_layout Standard
25933 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25943 height_special "totalheight"
25948 backgroundcolor "none"
25951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25954 This is a minipage.
25955 The text is set in an italic style.
25958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25961 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
25962 another formatting.
25970 \begin_layout Standard
25971 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25974 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
25978 as described in section
25979 \begin_inset space ~
25983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25985 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25990 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25996 \begin_layout Standard
25997 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26007 height_special "totalheight"
26012 backgroundcolor "none"
26015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26016 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26017 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26023 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26027 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26037 height_special "totalheight"
26042 backgroundcolor "none"
26045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26046 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26047 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26055 \begin_layout Standard
26056 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26062 \begin_layout Standard
26063 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26065 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26072 \begin_inset space ~
26080 \begin_layout Chapter
26081 Mathematical Formulas
26082 \begin_inset Index idx
26085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26092 \begin_inset Index idx
26095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26126 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26133 \begin_layout Standard
26134 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26139 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26142 \begin_layout Section
26144 \begin_inset Index idx
26147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26156 \begin_layout Standard
26157 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26170 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26172 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26173 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26174 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26176 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26182 \begin_layout Standard
26183 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26187 \begin_inset space ~
26192 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26195 \begin_layout Standard
26196 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26197 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26200 \begin_layout Standard
26201 This is a line with an inline formula
26202 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26208 \begin_layout Standard
26209 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26210 paragraph, like this one:
26211 \begin_inset Formula
26218 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26221 \begin_layout Standard
26223 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26225 For example, typing
26226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26239 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26240 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26244 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26247 \begin_inset space ~
26255 \begin_layout Subsection
26256 Navigating in Formulas
26257 \begin_inset Index idx
26260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26269 \begin_layout Standard
26270 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26271 achieved with the arrow keys.
26273 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26274 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26279 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26280 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26284 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26288 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26291 \end{array}\right]$
26299 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26304 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26305 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26308 \begin_layout Standard
26313 , printed in this document as
26314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26318 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26325 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26326 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26327 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26332 For example, if you want
26333 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26341 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26351 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26355 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26360 , since in the latter case only the
26363 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26368 will be under the square root sign:
26369 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26375 \begin_layout Standard
26376 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
26378 \begin_inset Formula
26380 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26389 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
26390 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
26393 \begin_layout Subsection
26397 \begin_layout Standard
26398 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26399 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
26403 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26404 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26405 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26406 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
26407 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26411 \begin_layout Subsection
26412 Exponents and Subscripts
26413 \begin_inset Index idx
26416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26423 \begin_inset Index idx
26426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26435 \begin_layout Standard
26436 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26439 arg "math-superscript"
26445 arg "math-subscript"
26448 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
26450 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26453 , type in a formula
26456 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26466 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26472 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26476 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26482 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26488 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
26490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26497 , you have to use an extra
26501 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26502 For example, if you want
26503 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26509 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26515 Subscripts are similar: To get
26516 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26522 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26530 \begin_layout Subsection
26532 \begin_inset Index idx
26535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26544 \begin_layout Standard
26545 Create a fraction either with the command
26551 or by using the icon
26554 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26560 \begin_inset space ~
26566 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26567 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26568 To move it to the bottom, simply press
26573 To move back up, press
26578 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
26579 \begin_inset Formula
26581 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26584 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26592 \begin_layout Subsection
26594 \begin_inset Index idx
26597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26606 \begin_layout Standard
26607 Roots can be created using the
26610 \begin_inset space ~
26618 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26624 arg "math-insert \\root"
26646 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
26652 always produces a square root.
26655 \begin_layout Subsection
26656 Operators with Limits
26657 \begin_inset Index idx
26660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26667 \begin_inset Index idx
26670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26677 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26679 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26686 \begin_layout Standard
26688 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26692 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26695 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26696 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26697 by entering them as you would enter a super-
26698 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
26699 The sum operator will automatically place its
26700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26707 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
26709 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26713 \begin_inset Formula
26715 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26720 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
26724 \begin_layout Standard
26725 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
26727 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
26728 behind the operator and using the menu
26730 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26731 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26733 \begin_inset space ~
26737 \begin_inset space ~
26751 \begin_layout Standard
26752 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26761 \begin_inset Index idx
26764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26771 \begin_inset Formula
26773 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26778 which will place the
26779 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26791 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26792 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26798 \begin_layout Standard
26799 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26806 Have a look at section
26807 \begin_inset space ~
26811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26813 reference "subsec:Functions"
26817 for an explanation of function macros.
26820 \begin_layout Subsection
26822 \begin_inset Index idx
26825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26834 \begin_layout Standard
26835 Most math symbols can be found in the
26838 \begin_inset space ~
26843 under one of several categories; including
26860 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
26864 \begin_layout Standard
26865 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26866 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
26867 don't have to use the
26870 \begin_inset space ~
26875 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
26877 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
26880 \begin_layout Subsection
26882 \begin_inset Index idx
26885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26894 \begin_layout Standard
26895 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
26901 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
26907 \begin_inset space ~
26915 arg "math-insert \\space"
26919 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
26920 For example, the sequence
26925 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
26928 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26930 \begin_inset Graphics
26931 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
26936 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
26937 the space marker and enter space again several times.
26938 With every space enter the size will be changed.
26939 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
26940 , because they are negative
26942 Here are two examples:
26945 \begin_layout Standard
26955 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
26961 \begin_layout Standard
26971 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
26977 \begin_layout Subsection
26979 \begin_inset Index idx
26982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26991 name "subsec:Functions"
26998 \begin_layout Standard
27002 \begin_inset space ~
27007 contains under the button
27010 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27013 a number of function macros, such as
27014 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27018 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27026 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27033 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27034 avoid confusions, because
27035 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27039 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27045 \begin_layout Standard
27046 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27048 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27052 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27058 \begin_layout Standard
27059 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27060 are placed, as described in section
27061 \begin_inset space ~
27065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27067 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27074 \begin_layout Subsection
27076 \begin_inset Index idx
27079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27088 \begin_layout Standard
27089 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27091 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27092 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27093 commands, for example, to enter
27094 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27097 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27098 Our example is entered by typing
27103 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27110 \begin_inset space ~
27114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27116 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27120 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27123 \begin_layout Standard
27124 \begin_inset Float table
27131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27132 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27137 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27141 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27151 \begin_inset Tabular
27152 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27153 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27154 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27155 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27156 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27240 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27294 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27348 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27358 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27402 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27456 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27510 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27564 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27618 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27672 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27717 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27738 \begin_layout Standard
27739 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27742 \begin_inset space ~
27750 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27753 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
27757 \begin_layout Section
27758 Brackets and Delimiters
27759 \begin_inset Index idx
27762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27769 \begin_inset Index idx
27772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27781 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27788 \begin_layout Standard
27789 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27791 For some purposes, using just the keys
27796 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
27797 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
27798 toolbar delimiter icon
27801 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27805 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27806 \begin_inset Formula
27808 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27816 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27817 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27821 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27824 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27830 \begin_inset Formula
27832 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27840 \begin_layout Standard
27841 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
27842 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
27846 \begin_layout Standard
27847 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
27848 left side and right side.
27849 If you use the option
27852 \begin_inset space ~
27857 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27858 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27860 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
27865 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27866 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
27869 \begin_layout Standard
27870 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
27871 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
27872 is to go inside the brackets.
27873 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27878 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
27879 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27880 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
27884 arg "math-delim ( )"
27890 \begin_layout Section
27891 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
27892 \begin_inset Index idx
27895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27902 \begin_inset Index idx
27905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27912 \begin_inset Index idx
27915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27916 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27924 \begin_layout Standard
27925 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27929 \begin_inset space ~
27937 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27941 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
27942 Here is an example:
27943 \begin_inset Formula
27945 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27954 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
27955 \begin_inset space ~
27959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27961 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27966 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
27967 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
27968 This alignment is set in the box
27973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28022 for every column as default.
28023 For example, the sequence
28024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28035 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28036 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28037 corresponds to the relevant column.
28038 The result will look like this:
28039 \begin_inset Formula
28042 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28043 column & has & has\,right\\
28044 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28053 \begin_layout Standard
28054 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28057 arg "newline-insert newline"
28060 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28061 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28063 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28066 or the math toolbar.
28069 \begin_layout Standard
28070 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28071 It can be created with the menu
28073 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28074 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28076 \begin_inset space ~
28088 Here is an example:
28089 \begin_inset Formula
28103 \begin_layout Standard
28104 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28107 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28110 arg "newline-insert newline"
28114 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28119 arg "newline-insert newline"
28122 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28127 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28130 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28131 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28132 A new row is created by every further entry of
28135 arg "newline-insert newline"
28139 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28140 Here is an example:
28141 \begin_inset Formula
28143 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28144 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28149 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28150 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28151 \begin_inset Formula
28153 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28161 \begin_layout Standard
28162 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28169 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28170 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28173 reference "eq:asquared"
28178 The other types are described in section
28179 \begin_inset space ~
28183 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28185 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28192 \begin_layout Section
28193 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28194 \begin_inset Index idx
28197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28198 Math ! Formula numbering
28204 \begin_inset Index idx
28207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28208 Math ! Referencing formulas
28214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28216 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28223 \begin_layout Standard
28224 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28226 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28227 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28229 \begin_inset space ~
28233 \begin_inset space ~
28241 arg "math-number-toggle"
28245 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28246 within parentheses.
28247 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28248 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28249 the document class.
28250 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28251 separated by a dot:
28252 \begin_inset Formula
28262 arg "math-number-toggle"
28265 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28266 You can only number displayed formulas.
28269 \begin_layout Standard
28270 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28272 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28273 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28275 \begin_inset space ~
28279 \begin_inset space ~
28287 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28290 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28291 \begin_inset Formula
28294 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28300 To number all lines use the shortcut
28303 arg "math-number-toggle"
28309 \begin_layout Standard
28310 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28313 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28314 A label is inserted with the menu
28316 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28325 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28326 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28327 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28339 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28340 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28341 We inserted in the following example the label
28342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28349 in the second line:
28350 \begin_inset Formula
28352 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28353 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28358 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28359 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28360 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28362 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28364 \begin_inset space ~
28372 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28376 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28377 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28378 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
28379 as the formula number:
28382 \begin_layout Standard
28383 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28386 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28393 \begin_layout Standard
28394 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28395 's cross-reference box are described in section
28396 \begin_inset space ~
28400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28402 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28407 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
28415 \begin_layout Section
28416 User defined math macros
28417 \begin_inset Index idx
28420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28429 \begin_layout Standard
28431 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
28432 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28433 Math macros are explained in section
28436 \begin_inset space ~
28448 \begin_layout Section
28452 \begin_layout Subsection
28454 \begin_inset Index idx
28457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28466 \begin_layout Standard
28467 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
28468 To set a font in a formula, use the
28471 \begin_inset space ~
28479 arg "math-insert \\font"
28482 , or enter its command, listed in table
28483 \begin_inset space ~
28487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28489 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28496 \begin_layout Standard
28497 \begin_inset Float table
28504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28505 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28510 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28514 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
28522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28524 \begin_inset Tabular
28525 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
28526 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28527 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28528 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28560 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28587 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28614 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28647 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28674 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28696 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
28697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28702 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28703 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
28711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28716 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
28728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28732 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28766 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28788 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
28789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28794 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28802 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
28810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28815 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
28827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28831 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28865 \begin_layout Standard
28866 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28874 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28877 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
28879 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
28883 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
28902 \begin_layout Standard
28903 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28904 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28909 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
28910 space when you need a space in the box.
28911 Here is an example where
28912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28923 denotes the set of numbers:
28924 \begin_inset Formula
28926 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28934 \begin_layout Standard
28935 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
28936 You can, for example, put a character in
28945 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
28949 \begin_inset Newline newline
28952 So it is better not to use this feature.
28955 \begin_layout Standard
28956 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
28957 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
28961 \begin_inset Newline newline
28964 You can only print them emboldened using the command
28970 , which works like the other typeface commands:
28971 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
28977 \begin_layout Standard
28984 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
28987 \begin_layout Standard
28988 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
28990 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28991 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28993 \begin_inset space ~
29001 \begin_layout Subsection
29003 \begin_inset Index idx
29006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29015 \begin_layout Standard
29016 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29018 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29022 \begin_inset space ~
29026 \begin_inset space ~
29034 \begin_inset space ~
29042 arg "math-insert \\font"
29046 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29047 in black instead of blue.
29048 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29049 Here is an example:
29050 \begin_inset Formula
29053 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29054 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29063 \begin_layout Subsection
29065 \begin_inset Index idx
29068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29077 \begin_layout Standard
29078 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29079 automatically chosen in most situations.
29097 For most characters,
29105 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29106 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29111 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29112 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29113 thinks are appropriate.
29114 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29117 arg "math-insert \\style"
29121 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29122 For example, you can set
29123 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29126 , which is normally in
29135 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29139 The four styles are used in the following example:
29142 \begin_layout Standard
29143 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29147 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29151 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29155 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29161 \begin_layout Standard
29162 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29163 is set in a particular size with the menu
29165 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29167 \begin_inset space ~
29172 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29173 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29174 will be adjusted to correspond.
29175 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29186 \begin_layout Standard
29190 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29196 \begin_layout Section
29197 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29199 \begin_inset Index idx
29202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29209 \begin_inset Index idx
29212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29221 \begin_layout Standard
29223 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29224 that are in common use.
29227 \begin_layout Subsection
29228 Enabling AMS-Support
29231 \begin_layout Standard
29232 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29234 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29250 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29251 selecting the checkbox
29254 \begin_inset space ~
29258 \begin_inset space ~
29262 \begin_inset space ~
29271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29275 \begin_inset Index idx
29278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29279 Document ! Settings
29287 \begin_inset space ~
29293 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29294 -errors in formulas,
29295 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29298 \begin_layout Subsection
29300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29302 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29307 \begin_inset Index idx
29310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29311 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29319 \begin_layout Standard
29320 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29321 provides a selection of different formula types.
29323 allows you to choose between
29344 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29345 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29352 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29355 \begin_layout Chapter
29359 \begin_layout Section
29361 \begin_inset Index idx
29364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29371 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29373 name "sec:Cross-References"
29380 \begin_layout Standard
29381 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29382 's strengths is cross-references.
29383 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
29385 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
29386 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29387 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29390 \begin_layout Enumerate
29394 \begin_layout Enumerate
29395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29397 name "enu:Second-item"
29404 \begin_layout Enumerate
29408 \begin_layout Standard
29409 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29411 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29414 or by pressing the toolbar button
29421 A gray label box like this:
29422 \begin_inset Graphics
29423 filename clipart/label.png
29427 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29429 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
29431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29464 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
29465 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
29467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29481 \begin_layout Standard
29482 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
29484 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29487 or the toolbar button
29490 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29494 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29495 \begin_inset Graphics
29496 filename clipart/reference.png
29500 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
29502 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29515 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
29519 \begin_layout Standard
29520 As an alternative to
29522 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29525 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29530 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
29531 to the actual cursor position via the menu
29533 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29545 \begin_layout Standard
29546 Here is our cross-reference: Item
29547 \begin_inset space ~
29551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29553 reference "enu:Second-item"
29560 \begin_layout Standard
29561 It is recommended to use a protected space
29565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29566 described in section
29567 \begin_inset space ~
29571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29573 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29582 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
29583 line breaks between them.
29586 \begin_layout Standard
29587 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29590 \begin_layout Description
29591 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
29592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29594 reference "fig:Two-images"
29601 \begin_layout Description
29602 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
29603 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
29605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29613 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29615 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29622 \begin_layout Description
29623 <page>: prints the page number: Page
29624 \begin_inset space ~
29628 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29629 LatexCommand pageref
29630 reference "fig:Two-images"
29637 \begin_layout Description
29639 \begin_inset space ~
29643 \begin_inset space ~
29646 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
29647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29648 LatexCommand vpageref
29649 reference "fig:Two-images"
29654 \begin_inset Newline newline
29657 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
29658 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
29659 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
29660 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29661 it prints “on the next page”.
29662 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29665 \begin_layout Description
29667 \begin_inset space ~
29671 \begin_inset space ~
29675 \begin_inset space ~
29678 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
29679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29681 reference "fig:Two-images"
29686 \begin_inset Newline newline
29689 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
29695 ; otherwise it behaves like
29699 \begin_inset space ~
29703 \begin_inset space ~
29712 \begin_layout Description
29714 \begin_inset space ~
29717 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29718 \begin_inset Newline newline
29722 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29730 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29740 \begin_inset Index idx
29743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29745 packages ! prettyref
29751 \begin_inset Index idx
29754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29756 packages ! refstyle
29767 \begin_inset Newline newline
29770 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29771 -package should be used for this feature by setting
29774 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
29778 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29779 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29787 is the default and preferred because
29791 supports only English documents.
29792 The format is specified by using the command
29796 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
29805 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29806 preamble of the document.
29807 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
29809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29825 \begin_inset Newline newline
29832 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
29837 \begin_inset Newline newline
29848 predefines reference formats for all available types.
29849 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
29851 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
29852 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
29857 , you might do so as follows:
29858 \begin_inset Newline newline
29865 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
29866 format{prop}{Proposition
29871 \begin_inset Newline newline
29874 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
29875 the package documentation
29876 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29878 key "prettyref,refstyle"
29884 \begin_inset Newline newline
29895 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
29902 \begin_layout Description
29904 \begin_inset space ~
29907 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
29908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29909 LatexCommand nameref
29910 reference "fig:Two-images"
29917 \begin_layout Description
29919 \begin_inset space ~
29922 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29923 label for the reference:
29924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29925 LatexCommand labelonly
29926 reference "fig:Two-images"
29931 \begin_inset Newline newline
29934 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
29935 Code, if you want to issue a command
29936 that \SpecialChar LyX
29942 , then you may want to use the
29945 \begin_inset space ~
29950 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
29952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29960 This is the form needed for e.
29961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29965 \begin_inset space \space{}
29972 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
29973 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
29975 The varieties are adjusted in the field
29979 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
29983 \begin_layout Standard
29984 You can only use the style
29988 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
29992 is always possible.
29995 \begin_layout Standard
29996 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
29997 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
29999 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30000 \begin_inset space ~
30004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30006 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30013 \begin_layout Standard
30014 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30018 \begin_inset space ~
30022 \begin_inset space ~
30027 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30028 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30029 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30032 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30035 \begin_inset space ~
30040 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30041 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30044 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30048 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30049 or, using the menu: Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30050 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30056 \begin_layout Standard
30057 You can change labels at any time.
30058 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30060 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30062 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30063 change them all manually
30068 \begin_layout Standard
30069 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30071 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30075 \begin_layout Standard
30076 References are described in detail in the section
30087 \begin_layout Section
30088 Table of Contents and other Listings
30089 \begin_inset Index idx
30092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30099 \begin_inset Index idx
30102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30103 Navigating ! Outline
30109 \begin_inset Index idx
30112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30128 \begin_layout Subsection
30130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30132 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30139 \begin_layout Standard
30140 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30143 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30145 \begin_inset space ~
30149 \begin_inset space ~
30155 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30157 If you click on it, the
30161 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30162 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30163 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30165 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30167 \begin_inset space ~
30172 that is described in section
30173 \begin_inset space ~
30177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30179 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30186 \begin_layout Standard
30187 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30188 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30190 \begin_inset space ~
30194 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30196 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30200 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30202 \begin_inset space ~
30206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30208 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30212 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30214 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30217 \begin_layout Subsection
30218 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30221 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30228 \begin_layout Standard
30229 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30231 You can insert them via the
30233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30234 List/Contents/References
30237 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30240 \begin_layout Section
30241 URLs and Hyperlinks
30242 \begin_inset Index idx
30245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30252 \begin_inset Index idx
30255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30264 \begin_layout Subsection
30266 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30275 \begin_layout Standard
30276 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30284 \begin_layout Standard
30285 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30287 \begin_inset Flex URL
30290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30292 https://www.lyx.org
30300 \begin_layout Standard
30301 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30307 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30311 \begin_layout Standard
30312 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30320 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30329 \begin_layout Subsection
30331 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30333 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30340 \begin_layout Standard
30341 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30346 or with the toolbar button
30353 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30362 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30363 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
30364 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30366 name "LyX's homepage"
30367 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30372 , an Email address like this:
30373 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30375 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30376 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30382 , or a link to a file.
30387 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30395 \begin_layout Standard
30396 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
30398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30409 to the link target.
30412 \begin_layout Standard
30413 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30414 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30415 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
30416 the text style dialog.
30417 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30421 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30423 name "LyX's homepage"
30424 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30432 \begin_layout Standard
30433 The link text color can be changed, when the option
30437 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30439 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30440 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30444 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
30446 \begin_inset Newline newline
30454 \begin_inset Newline newline
30461 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30462 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
30466 \begin_layout Section
30468 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
30470 \begin_inset Index idx
30473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30482 name "sec:Counters"
30489 \begin_layout Standard
30491 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
30492 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30493 is its ability to manage counters.
30494 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
30495 modify counters directly.
30496 This can be done in LyX using the counter inset, which is accessible from
30498 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
30502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30504 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
30505 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
30506 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
30507 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
30508 to set the section counter to four.
30515 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
30516 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
30517 These effects can also be limited to LyX itself.
30518 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in LaTeX.
30521 \begin_layout Standard
30523 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
30524 There are five commands you can use:
30527 \begin_layout Enumerate
30529 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
30530 Set counter: Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
30533 \begin_layout Enumerate
30535 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
30536 Increase counter: Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or
30537 to subtract, if you choose a negative number)
30540 \begin_layout Enumerate
30542 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
30543 Reset to zero: Sets the value of the counter to 0.
30546 \begin_layout Enumerate
30548 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
30549 Save value of counter: Saves the value of the counter so that it can later
30553 \begin_layout Enumerate
30555 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
30556 Restore value of counter: Restores the previously saved value.
30559 \begin_layout Standard
30561 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
30562 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
30563 those that are available in the current document class.
30568 \begin_layout Section
30570 \begin_inset Index idx
30573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30580 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30582 name "sec:Appendices"
30589 \begin_layout Standard
30590 Appendices are created with the menu
30592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30594 \begin_inset space ~
30598 \begin_inset space ~
30604 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
30605 as the appendix part of the book.
30606 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30609 \begin_layout Standard
30610 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30611 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30612 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
30613 and the subsection number.
30614 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30618 \begin_layout Standard
30620 \begin_inset space ~
30624 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30626 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
30634 \begin_inset space ~
30638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30640 reference "subsec:Export"
30647 \begin_layout Section
30649 \begin_inset Index idx
30652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30659 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30661 name "sec:Bibliography"
30668 \begin_layout Standard
30669 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30671 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
30672 \begin_inset space ~
30676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30678 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30685 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
30690 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30691 \begin_inset space ~
30695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30697 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30702 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
30703 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
30704 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
30708 using a bibliography database.
30711 \begin_layout Standard
30712 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
30713 use two bibliographies in this document, a
30717 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30718 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
30719 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30720 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
30721 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30724 \begin_layout Subsection
30725 The Bibliography Environment
30726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30728 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30735 \begin_layout Standard
30740 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
30742 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30751 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
30753 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
30754 of ASCII characters only.
30758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30760 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30763 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
30769 \begin_inset Newline newline
30773 \begin_inset Flex URL
30776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30778 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
30788 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30798 , a short form of its title, as the key.
30799 \begin_inset Newline newline
30806 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
30807 the number of the entry.
30812 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30821 \begin_layout Standard
30822 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
30824 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30827 or the toolbar button
30830 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
30834 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
30835 containing the available citations.
30836 Select one or more keys from the list and
30846 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
30847 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
30851 \begin_layout Standard
30852 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
30853 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
30854 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
30856 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30860 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30866 \begin_layout Standard
30870 Companion Second Edition
30873 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30875 key "latexcompanion"
30883 \begin_layout Standard
30884 The \SpecialChar LyX
30885 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
30886 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30896 \begin_layout Standard
30897 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30904 \begin_inset Index idx
30907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30916 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
30917 the label needs to be given the form
30918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30929 Author A and Author B(Year)
30930 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30937 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
30944 \begin_inset space ~
30949 in the document settings
30950 \begin_inset Index idx
30953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30954 Document ! Settings
30961 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
30963 \begin_inset space ~
30969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30971 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
30979 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
30981 Once you have done that, the
30985 dialog has three input fields instead of the
31002 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
31003 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
31004 These two are madatory.
31005 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
31008 Baker, Jones, and Williams
31010 ) and in abrreviated form (
31017 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31018 add the abbreviated form to
31022 and the full list to the optional
31030 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31031 If specified like this,
31033 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31034 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31037 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31044 is specified, toggling
31045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31052 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31053 full and abbreviated list
31057 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31058 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31059 the citation references.
31060 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31065 \begin_layout Standard
31066 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31069 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31071 \begin_inset space ~
31079 arg "layout-paragraph"
31083 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31086 \begin_layout Subsection
31087 Bibliography databases
31088 \begin_inset Index idx
31091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31092 Bibliography ! Databases
31098 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31100 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31107 \begin_layout Standard
31108 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31114 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31116 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31117 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31122 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31124 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31125 your working field in a database.
31126 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31127 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31128 list for that document.
31129 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31133 \begin_layout Standard
31134 The database is a text file with the file extension
31135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31146 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31147 The format is explained in
31148 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31155 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31157 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31159 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31165 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31166 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31167 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31169 \begin_inset Flex URL
31172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31174 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31182 \begin_layout Standard
31184 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31185 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31186 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31188 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31190 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31191 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31192 Those are addressed by
31197 \begin_inset Index idx
31200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31202 packages ! biblatex
31208 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31209 (although it has been significantly
31210 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31220 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31221 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31222 might conversely fail to correctly
31223 handle databases that use specific
31232 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31236 \begin_layout Standard
31237 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31242 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31244 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31248 \begin_inset Index idx
31251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31252 Document ! Settings
31264 \begin_inset space ~
31269 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31277 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31278 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31280 \begin_inset Index idx
31283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31284 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31293 \begin_layout Standard
31294 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31297 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31298 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31300 \begin_inset space ~
31306 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31307 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31315 Add bibliography to TOC
31317 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31322 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
31323 in the document or just the cited references.
31325 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
31330 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
31331 differ from the encoding of the document.
31336 \begin_layout Standard
31337 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31338 style file is a text file with the file extension
31339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31350 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31351 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31352 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
31353 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
31355 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
31360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31361 For information on how this is done, have a look at
31362 \begin_inset Newline newline
31366 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31368 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31378 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31383 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
31387 \begin_layout Standard
31388 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31391 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31393 \begin_inset Index idx
31396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31397 Bibliography ! Biblatex
31403 \begin_inset Index idx
31406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31408 packages ! biblatex
31416 \begin_layout Standard
31417 Accessing a database via
31421 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31424 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31425 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31427 \begin_inset space ~
31433 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31434 you cannot select a
31439 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
31443 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31446 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
31447 As for the styles, note the following.
31452 \begin_layout Standard
31457 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
31459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31470 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
31471 file (text file with the file extension
31472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31483 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31484 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
31486 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
31490 \begin_layout Standard
31495 styles are not set in the
31498 \begin_inset space ~
31503 dialog, but in the document settings.
31504 \begin_inset Index idx
31507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31508 Document ! Settings
31513 However, in the dialog in the
31517 field, which is only visible if you use
31521 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
31522 example how its heading will appear).
31523 These options are described in detail in the
31528 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31538 \begin_layout Standard
31539 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31540 \begin_inset space ~
31544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31546 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31556 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31557 Bibliography Processors
31560 \begin_layout Standard
31561 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
31562 uses a bibliography processor,
31563 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
31564 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31565 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31567 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
31568 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
31571 \begin_layout Standard
31572 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
31574 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31575 You can do this on a general level in
31577 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31578 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31579 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31582 or for individual documents in
31584 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31585 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31589 The following variants are available by default:
31592 \begin_layout Description
31593 biber a specific, modern processor
31594 \begin_inset Index idx
31597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31604 developed exclusively for
31608 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31614 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
31619 makes use of; if you use the
31623 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
31630 \begin_layout Description
31631 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
31632 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
31633 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
31637 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31640 \begin_layout Description
31641 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
31642 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
31646 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
31650 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
31654 features are supported.
31657 \begin_layout Standard
31658 By default (with the
31664 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31665 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31678 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31679 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31680 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31683 ), \SpecialChar LyX
31684 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
31697 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31698 -based bibliography styles).
31699 This should suit most needs.
31702 \begin_layout Standard
31703 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
31704 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31705 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31710 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31711 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31712 You can adjust it in
31714 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31715 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31716 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31722 \begin_layout Standard
31723 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
31724 can add below the selection.
31725 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
31726 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31732 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31742 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31746 \begin_layout Standard
31748 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
31750 These are explained in detail in section
31752 Customizing Bibliographies
31756 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31761 Additional Features
31764 \change_inserted 5863208 1598273348
31768 \begin_layout Subsection
31770 \begin_inset Index idx
31773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31774 Bibliography ! Citation format
31780 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31782 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
31789 \begin_layout Standard
31790 Many different citation formats are common, e.
31791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31795 \begin_inset space \space{}
31798 numerical citation (as
31799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31806 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
31807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31811 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31814 ) or author-year citations (as
31815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31824 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
31828 \begin_layout Standard
31829 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
31832 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31833 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31837 \begin_inset Index idx
31840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31841 Document ! Settings
31846 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
31852 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
31853 labels, is there to use
31856 \begin_inset space ~
31867 \begin_inset space ~
31872 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
31873 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31875 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31882 \begin_layout Standard
31883 With a bibliography database (see
31884 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31886 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31893 ) one has in contrary to the
31897 environment full access to the formatting styles.
31898 These style formats are available:
31901 \begin_layout Description
31903 \begin_inset space ~
31906 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31907 -based approached without any additional packages
31908 (simple numeric citations).
31911 \begin_layout Description
31912 Biblatex loads the package
31917 \begin_inset Index idx
31920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31922 packages ! biblatex
31927 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
31929 Biblatex citation style
31933 Biblatex bibliography style
31936 Options to the package
31940 can be entered in the
31947 \begin_layout Description
31949 \begin_inset space ~
31953 \begin_inset space ~
31956 mode) loads the package
31960 with the natbib compatibility mode.
31961 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
31973 behavior very closely.
31978 this option has some additional styles.
31983 styles are also supported by this variant.
31986 \begin_layout Description
31988 \begin_inset space ~
31991 (BibTeX) loads the package
31996 \begin_inset Index idx
31999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32006 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32009 \begin_layout Description
32011 \begin_inset space ~
32014 (BibTeX) loads the package
32019 \begin_inset Index idx
32022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32029 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32032 \begin_layout Standard
32041 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32043 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32052 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32054 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32055 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32057 Biblatex citation style
32060 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32066 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32070 \begin_layout Standard
32071 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32072 are available in the
32077 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32078 a name prefix such as
32079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32094 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32095 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32099 \begin_inset space \space{}
32103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32114 \begin_layout Standard
32115 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32121 \begin_inset space \space{}
32124 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32130 \begin_inset space \space{}
32134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32146 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32150 \begin_inset space ~
32158 \begin_inset space ~
32164 Here is a simple example where the text
32165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32169 \begin_inset space ~
32173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32176 appears after the reference:
32179 \begin_layout Quote
32181 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32184 key "latexcompanion"
32192 \begin_layout Standard
32193 All styles except for
32197 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32207 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32211 \begin_layout Standard
32212 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32213 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32214 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32219 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32220 multi-citation (so-called
32221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32224 qualified citation lists
32225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32231 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32236 dialog will display three columns in the field
32243 \begin_inset space ~
32251 \begin_inset space ~
32259 \begin_inset space ~
32265 If you double-click on an item's
32268 \begin_inset space ~
32276 \begin_inset space ~
32281 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32284 General text before
32290 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32293 \begin_layout Subsection
32295 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32296 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32298 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32302 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
32306 \begin_layout Standard
32308 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
32310 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
32313 \begin_inset space ~
32317 \begin_inset space ~
32321 \begin_inset space ~
32325 \begin_inset space ~
32328 Content\SpecialChar ldots
32331 context menu if specific conditions are met:
32334 \begin_layout Itemize
32336 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
32337 If citation entries include any of the fields
32338 \begin_inset Flex Code
32341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32343 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32352 \begin_inset Flex Code
32355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32357 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32365 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
32366 \begin_inset Flex Code
32369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32371 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32379 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
32380 \begin_inset Flex Code
32383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32385 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32393 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
32396 \begin_layout Itemize
32398 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
32399 If citation entries include any of the fields
32400 \begin_inset Flex Code
32403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32405 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32413 (filled by JabRef) or
32414 \begin_inset Flex Code
32417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32419 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
32427 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
32428 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
32429 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
32432 \begin_layout Standard
32434 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
32435 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
32436 also searches your disk for matching files if you
32439 Search drive for cited files
32443 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32444 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
32445 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32446 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32450 It uses the tokens supplied at
32454 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
32455 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the title of the file (at
32456 arbitrary position).
32458 opens the first matching file it finds.
32459 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
32460 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
32461 the chance this works for you.
32466 \begin_layout Standard
32468 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32469 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
32470 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32472 \begin_inset Flex Code
32475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32477 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
32486 \begin_inset Flex Code
32489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32491 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
32499 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the Customization
32503 Cite format description
32510 \begin_layout Section
32512 \begin_inset Index idx
32515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32522 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32531 \begin_layout Standard
32532 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32534 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32536 \begin_inset space ~
32541 or the toolbar button
32548 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32549 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
32550 by \SpecialChar LyX
32551 as the index entry.
32554 \begin_layout Standard
32555 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32558 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32560 \begin_inset space ~
32566 A light blue box labeled
32567 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32575 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32578 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32579 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32583 \begin_layout Standard
32584 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32585 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32586 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
32587 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32589 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32591 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32599 \begin_layout Subsection
32600 Grouping Index Entries
32601 \begin_inset Index idx
32604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32613 \begin_layout Standard
32614 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
32616 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
32617 lists under the entry
32618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32622 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32626 First we create the entry
32627 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32631 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32635 \begin_inset space ~
32639 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32641 reference "subsec:Lists"
32646 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32647 \begin_inset space ~
32651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32653 reference "sec:Itemize"
32657 , we insert the command
32660 \begin_layout Standard
32666 \begin_layout Standard
32670 \begin_layout Standard
32676 \begin_layout Standard
32677 for the enumerated list in section
32678 \begin_inset space ~
32682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32684 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32691 \begin_layout Standard
32692 The exclamation mark
32693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32700 marks the grouping levels.
32701 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
32702 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32703 If we don't have an index entry for
32704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32711 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
32714 \begin_layout Subsection
32716 \begin_inset Index idx
32719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32720 Index ! Page ranges
32728 \begin_layout Standard
32729 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
32731 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32732 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
32733 an index entry in section
32734 \begin_inset space ~
32738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32740 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32747 \begin_layout Standard
32750 Paragraph environments|(
32753 \begin_layout Standard
32754 and another entry at the end of section
32755 \begin_inset space ~
32759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32761 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32768 \begin_layout Standard
32771 Paragraph environments|)
32774 \begin_layout Standard
32776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32788 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32799 respectively start and end the index range.
32800 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32801 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
32802 the pages of the indexed document parts.
32803 An example is the index entry
32804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32807 Document ! Settings
32808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32814 \begin_layout Subsection
32816 \begin_inset Index idx
32819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32820 Index ! Cross referencing
32828 \begin_layout Standard
32829 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32830 We referred for example in the index entry
32831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32839 \begin_inset space ~
32843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32845 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
32849 ) to the index entry
32850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32857 in the same section using the entry
32860 \begin_layout Standard
32863 GIF|see{Image formats}
32866 \begin_layout Standard
32867 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
32869 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
32870 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
32873 \begin_layout Subsection
32875 \begin_inset Index idx
32878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32879 Index ! Entry order
32887 \begin_layout Standard
32888 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
32889 follow the rules for the index order.
32890 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
32895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32896 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
32898 \begin_inset space ~
32902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32904 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
32913 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
32914 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
32915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32939 \begin_inset Index idx
32942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32943 Dummy entries ! maïs
32949 \begin_inset Index idx
32952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32953 Dummy entries ! maître
32959 \begin_inset Index idx
32962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32963 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
32968 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
32969 maïs, maison, maître.
32970 To achieve this, we use the command
32973 \begin_layout Standard
32976 previous entry@current entry
32979 \begin_layout Standard
32980 In our case we want to have
32981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32989 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32996 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
32999 \begin_layout Standard
33005 \begin_layout Standard
33006 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33007 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33009 See the next subsection for an example.
33012 \begin_layout Subsection
33014 \begin_inset Index idx
33017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33018 Index ! Entry layout
33026 \begin_layout Standard
33027 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33028 \begin_inset Index idx
33031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33034 This is an italic dummy entry
33039 You can also format the page number using the character
33040 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33047 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33048 -command without a backslash.
33049 We can write for example
33052 \begin_layout Standard
33055 italic page number:|textit
33058 \begin_layout Standard
33059 to get the page number in italic.
33060 \begin_inset Index idx
33063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33064 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33069 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33070 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33088 \begin_inset space ~
33094 Have a look at section
33095 \begin_inset space ~
33099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33101 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33105 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33109 \begin_layout Standard
33110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33118 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33122 to generate the index, see section
33123 \begin_inset space ~
33127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33129 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33138 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33143 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33144 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33147 key "latexcompanion"
33160 \begin_layout Standard
33161 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33163 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33164 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33165 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33166 If so, put the following in the preamble
33169 \begin_layout Standard
33181 \begin_layout Standard
33185 \begin_layout Standard
33191 \begin_layout Standard
33192 in the index entry.
33193 \begin_inset Index idx
33196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33197 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33202 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33203 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33204 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33207 \begin_layout Standard
33208 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33209 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33210 a bold font for all index entries.
33211 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33223 documentation for details,
33224 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33226 key "makeindex,xindy"
33234 \begin_layout Subsection
33236 \begin_inset Index idx
33239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33248 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33255 \begin_layout Standard
33256 If the index generation program
33260 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33261 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33265 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33266 distribution, is used.
33270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33275 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33276 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33277 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33278 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33279 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33289 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33291 dialog, see section
33292 \begin_inset space ~
33296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33298 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33303 The available options are listed and explained in
33304 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33306 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33312 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
33316 \begin_layout Standard
33317 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
33318 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33321 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33322 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33326 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
33327 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33330 \begin_layout Subsection
33334 \begin_layout Standard
33335 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33336 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
33337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33344 next to the standard index.
33346 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
33347 that add this feature.
33354 \begin_inset Index idx
33357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33359 packages ! splitidx
33364 package to generate multiple indexes.
33365 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33371 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33373 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33381 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33382 style, but it also includes
33383 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33384 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33392 \begin_layout Standard
33393 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33394 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
33396 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33397 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33400 and select the option
33402 Use multiple Indexes
33409 already contains the standard index
33410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33418 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
33419 also appear as a heading) to the
33423 input field and press the
33428 The new index now also appears in the list.
33429 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33430 label color to the new index.
33433 \begin_layout Standard
33434 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
33437 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33438 List/Contents/References
33444 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33445 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
33446 are additional features:
33449 \begin_layout Itemize
33450 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
33451 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33454 \begin_layout Itemize
33455 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
33456 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
33461 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33462 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
33463 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
33464 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33467 \begin_layout Itemize
33472 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33473 code in the name of the index.
33476 \begin_layout Section
33477 Nomenclature/Glossary
33478 \begin_inset Index idx
33481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33488 \begin_inset Index idx
33491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33522 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33529 \begin_layout Standard
33530 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
33531 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
33532 called nomenclature or glossary.
33535 \begin_layout Standard
33536 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33543 \begin_inset Index idx
33546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33554 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33556 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33563 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33567 \begin_layout Standard
33568 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
33569 and then use the menu
33571 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33577 \begin_inset space ~
33582 or the toolbar button
33585 arg "nomencl-insert"
33590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33601 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33604 \begin_layout Standard
33605 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33606 The first is the term or
33610 that you wish to define.
33615 of the term or symbol.
33618 \begin_layout Standard
33619 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33627 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33628 code for nomenclature entries the option
33632 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33640 \begin_layout Subsection
33641 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
33642 \begin_inset Index idx
33645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33646 Nomenclature ! Layout
33654 \begin_layout Standard
33655 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
33659 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33666 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33674 \begin_inset Newline newline
33682 \begin_inset Newline newline
33688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33695 character starts/ends the formula.
33696 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33697 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
33699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33709 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
33719 \begin_layout Standard
33720 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33721 syntax is given in section
33722 \begin_inset space ~
33726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33728 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33735 \begin_layout Standard
33739 \begin_inset space ~
33744 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
33746 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
33747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33751 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33758 in this document is:
33759 \begin_inset Newline newline
33764 dummy entry for the character
33769 \begin_inset Newline newline
33781 \begin_inset space ~
33791 font use the command
33820 \begin_layout Standard
33821 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
33822 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33826 \begin_inset space \space{}
33830 \begin_inset Newline newline
33846 \begin_inset Newline newline
33849 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
33850 This command will make the font of all symbols
33857 \begin_inset space ~
33865 \begin_layout Standard
33866 If the characters |
33867 \begin_inset space \space{}
33871 \begin_inset space \space{}
33875 \begin_inset space \space{}
33879 \begin_inset space \space{}
33883 \begin_inset space \space{}
33886 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
33887 code they need to be escaped
33888 by adding a quote character in front of them.
33889 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33890 LatexCommand nomenclature
33891 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
33892 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
33900 \begin_layout Subsection
33901 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
33902 \begin_inset Index idx
33905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33906 Nomenclature ! Sort order
33914 \begin_layout Standard
33915 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33916 -code of the symbol
33918 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
33920 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
33923 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33924 LatexCommand nomenclature
33926 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
33934 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33938 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
33939 LatexCommand nomenclature
33942 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
33948 They will be sorted by
33949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33975 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33978 will be sorted before the
33982 since the character
33983 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33987 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33990 is considered in sorting.
33993 \begin_layout Standard
33994 To control the sort order, you can edit the
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34002 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34003 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34005 For the example given, you can insert
34009 in this field for the
34010 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34017 will be located before
34018 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34024 \begin_layout Standard
34025 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34030 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34040 \begin_layout Subsection
34041 Nomenclature Options
34042 \begin_inset Index idx
34045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34046 Nomenclature ! Options
34052 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34054 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34061 \begin_layout Standard
34066 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34067 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34070 \begin_layout Description
34071 refeq Appends the phrase
34072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34087 to every nomenclature entry, where
34093 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34096 \begin_layout Description
34097 refpage Appends the phrase
34098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34113 to every nomenclature entry, where
34119 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34122 \begin_layout Description
34123 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34127 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34128 class options list in the
34130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34134 In this document the options
34141 \begin_layout Standard
34142 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34148 \begin_layout Standard
34149 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34150 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34155 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34158 \begin_layout Description
34168 \begin_layout Description
34171 nomrefpage Like the
34178 \begin_layout Description
34181 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34190 \begin_layout Description
34194 \begin_inset space ~
34200 \begin_inset space ~
34205 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34208 \begin_layout Standard
34210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34217 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34218 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34222 \begin_layout Standard
34231 \begin_inset Newline newline
34237 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34241 \begin_inset space ~
34253 unskip, see equation
34256 \begin_inset Newline newline
34263 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34264 \begin_inset Newline newline
34270 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34274 \begin_inset space ~
34291 \begin_layout Standard
34292 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
34295 \begin_inset space ~
34300 in the document settings under
34303 \begin_inset space ~
34311 \begin_layout Standard
34319 \begin_inset Newline newline
34323 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34327 \begin_inset space ~
34339 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34341 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34342 \begin_inset Newline newline
34349 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34350 \begin_inset Newline newline
34354 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34358 \begin_inset space ~
34370 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34375 \begin_layout Subsection
34376 Printing the Nomenclature
34377 \begin_inset Index idx
34380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34381 Nomenclature ! Printing
34389 \begin_layout Standard
34390 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
34392 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34393 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34409 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34410 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34411 You can choose between these settings:
34414 \begin_layout Description
34415 Default a space of 1
34416 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34422 \begin_layout Description
34424 \begin_inset space ~
34428 \begin_inset space ~
34431 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34434 \begin_layout Description
34435 Custom custom space
34438 \begin_layout Standard
34439 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34448 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
34456 For example, in order to change the name to
34460 , add the following line to the preamble:
34463 \begin_layout Standard
34476 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34479 \begin_layout Standard
34480 When you are using another document language than English, replace
34481 \begin_inset Newline newline
34496 , where *** is the name of the language used.
34499 \begin_layout Subsection
34500 Nomenclature Program
34501 \begin_inset Index idx
34504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34505 Nomenclature ! Program
34511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34513 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34520 \begin_layout Standard
34526 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34527 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
34529 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34534 by adding options, see section
34535 \begin_inset space ~
34539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34541 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34546 The available options are listed and explained in
34547 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34549 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34557 \begin_layout Section
34559 \begin_inset Index idx
34562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34569 \begin_inset Index idx
34572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34573 Document ! Branches
34579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34581 name "sec:Branches"
34588 \begin_layout Standard
34589 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
34590 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
34591 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
34592 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
34595 \begin_layout Standard
34596 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
34597 allows you to put text into branches.
34598 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
34599 To create a branch, either select the menu
34601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34602 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
34605 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
34607 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34614 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
34615 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
34616 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
34617 and whether the name of the branch should
34618 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
34619 (see below for an example).
34620 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
34621 to the name of the other) and to add
34622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34634 \begin_inset space ~
34637 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
34638 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
34641 \begin_layout Standard
34642 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
34643 These boxes are inserted via the menu
34645 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34648 where you can choose a branch.
34649 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
34653 \begin_layout Standard
34654 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
34655 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
34658 \begin_layout Standard
34659 \begin_inset Branch Question
34663 \begin_layout Standard
34668 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
34676 \begin_layout Standard
34677 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34681 \begin_layout Standard
34686 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
34694 \begin_layout Standard
34701 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34702 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34705 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
34706 Consider for example a file
34707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34714 which has the above branches.
34716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34723 is active, the PDF export file would be called
34724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34747 branch were inactive,
34748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34763 branch was active, likewise
34764 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34779 branch was active, and
34780 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34783 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
34784 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34787 if both branches were active.
34788 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
34789 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34795 \begin_layout Standard
34796 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
34802 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
34803 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
34807 \begin_inset space ~
34815 \begin_layout Standard
34816 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34820 \begin_layout Standard
34826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34833 branch is deactivated.
34839 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34845 \begin_layout Standard
34846 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
34847 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
34848 definitions for each branch.
34849 For example you can define for the question branch
34853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34854 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34855 -syntax, see section
34856 \begin_inset space ~
34860 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34862 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34874 \begin_layout Standard
34884 \begin_layout Standard
34894 \begin_layout Standard
34895 and for the answer branch
34898 \begin_layout Standard
34908 \begin_layout Standard
34918 \begin_layout Standard
34919 \begin_inset Branch Question
34923 \begin_layout Standard
34927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34955 \begin_layout Standard
34956 \begin_inset Branch Answer
34960 \begin_layout Standard
34964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34992 \begin_layout Standard
34993 Now it is possible to use the
34997 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35004 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35007 commands to obtain conditional output.
35008 Here is an example formula where only the
35015 \begin_inset Formula
35017 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35025 \begin_layout Standard
35026 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35034 \begin_layout Standard
35035 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35041 \begin_inset space \space{}
35044 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35046 For this advanced usage, see the
35052 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35057 \begin_layout Section
35059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35061 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35066 \begin_inset Index idx
35069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35078 \begin_layout Standard
35081 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35082 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35085 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
35087 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35093 \begin_inset Index idx
35096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35098 packages ! hyperref
35103 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
35104 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35105 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
35106 part of the document.
35109 \begin_layout Standard
35110 The header information in the dialog tab
35114 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35115 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
35116 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35117 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35121 \begin_inset space ~
35125 \begin_inset space ~
35130 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
35131 tries to extract the header information from your document title
35132 and author entries.
35136 \begin_inset space ~
35140 \begin_inset space ~
35144 \begin_inset space ~
35149 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
35152 \begin_layout Standard
35153 You can specify in the dialog tab
35157 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
35162 \begin_inset space ~
35166 \begin_inset space ~
35170 \begin_inset space ~
35175 option allows long links to be split;
35178 \begin_inset space ~
35182 \begin_inset space ~
35186 \begin_inset space ~
35194 \begin_inset space ~
35199 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35202 \begin_inset space ~
35207 colors the different links.
35208 The default colors are:
35211 \begin_layout Labeling
35212 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35217 for hyperlinks and URLs
35220 \begin_layout Labeling
35221 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35229 \begin_layout Labeling
35230 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35238 \begin_layout Standard
35239 but you can change these in the field
35244 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35247 \begin_layout Standard
35250 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
35253 \begin_layout Standard
35258 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
35259 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
35260 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35263 \begin_layout Standard
35268 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
35269 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35270 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
35280 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
35281 when opening the PDF.
35283 \begin_inset space ~
35286 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
35287 \begin_inset space ~
35290 1 will only display the sections.
35293 \begin_layout Standard
35294 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35295 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
35301 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35302 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35312 \begin_layout Section
35314 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35318 name "sec:TeX-Code"
35325 \begin_layout Subsection
35328 \begin_inset Index idx
35331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35341 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35348 \begin_layout Standard
35349 As \SpecialChar LyX
35350 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35351 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35352 commands and constructs,
35355 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35356 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35357 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
35358 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35359 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
35360 cannot support all packages and
35364 \begin_layout Standard
35365 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35366 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35367 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35371 Code box is created by the menu
35373 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35375 \begin_inset space ~
35380 or by the toolbar button
35393 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
35401 \begin_layout Standard
35402 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35404 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35406 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
35410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35411 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35416 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35423 , you can write the command part
35429 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35430 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35434 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35435 Code box behind the word.
35436 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35437 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
35441 \begin_layout Standard
35442 \begin_inset Graphics
35443 filename clipart/ERT.png
35451 \begin_layout Standard
35455 \begin_layout Standard
35456 This is a line with a
35460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35483 \begin_layout Standard
35484 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35492 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
35493 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
35494 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
35495 know that the command is finished.
35503 \begin_layout Subsection
35504 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35506 \begin_inset Argument 1
35509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35510 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
35517 \begin_inset Index idx
35520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35528 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35530 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35537 \begin_layout Standard
35538 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
35539 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35540 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
35541 uses in the background.
35542 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
35543 is based on commands, you can
35544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35552 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
35553 any time if you know the right commands.
35554 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
35555 is the end of the day.
35556 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
35557 all caption labels bold.
35558 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
35560 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
35564 \begin_layout Standard
35565 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
35567 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35569 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35572 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35582 \begin_layout Standard
35583 As result you find that the package
35588 \begin_inset Index idx
35591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35599 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
35601 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35604 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35608 \begin_inset space ~
35616 \begin_layout Standard
35621 usepackage[options]{package name}
35624 \begin_layout Standard
35625 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
35626 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
35627 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
35628 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
35631 \begin_layout Standard
35632 In your case the package name is
35637 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
35642 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
35643 So you add the command
35646 \begin_layout Standard
35651 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
35654 \begin_layout Standard
35655 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
35659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35660 For more commands provided by the
35664 package, have a look at its documentation,
35665 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35680 \begin_layout Standard
35681 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
35683 For example if you use a
35687 class, you don't need the package
35691 , you can instead write
35694 \begin_layout Standard
35699 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
35704 \begin_layout Standard
35705 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
35706 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
35707 documentation of the document class you want to use.
35714 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
35717 \begin_layout Standard
35718 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
35719 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
35721 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35722 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
35723 Code box as described in the previous
35727 \begin_layout Standard
35728 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35729 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35732 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35734 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
35742 \begin_layout Standard
35743 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
35749 \begin_layout Standard
35753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35763 \begin_inset Note Note
35766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35767 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
35775 \begin_layout Left Header
35776 \begin_inset Argument 1
35779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35799 \begin_inset Note Note
35802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35803 defines the header line as described below
35811 \begin_layout Center Header
35812 \begin_inset Argument 1
35815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35824 \begin_layout Right Header
35825 \begin_inset Argument 1
35828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35849 \begin_layout Left Footer
35850 \begin_inset Argument 1
35853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35874 \begin_layout Center Footer
35875 \begin_inset Argument 1
35878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35890 \begin_inset Newline newline
35894 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
35900 \begin_layout Right Footer
35901 \begin_inset Argument 1
35904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35926 \begin_layout Section
35927 Customized Page Headers and Footers
35928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35930 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
35935 \begin_inset Index idx
35938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35939 Document ! Header/Footer line
35945 \begin_inset Index idx
35948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35957 \begin_layout Standard
35958 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
35962 \begin_inset space ~
35973 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35979 \begin_inset space ~
35985 As a second step add in the menu
35987 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35988 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35997 Custom Header/Footerlines
36000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36004 This module offers the following 6
36005 \begin_inset space ~
36011 \begin_layout Description
36013 \begin_inset space ~
36017 \begin_inset space ~
36021 \begin_inset space ~
36025 \begin_inset space ~
36029 \begin_inset space ~
36035 \begin_layout Description
36037 \begin_inset space ~
36041 \begin_inset space ~
36045 \begin_inset space ~
36049 \begin_inset space ~
36053 \begin_inset space ~
36059 \begin_layout Standard
36060 for the different positions in the header/footer.
36061 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
36064 \begin_layout Standard
36065 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
36066 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
36068 \begin_inset space ~
36072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36074 reference "fig:Page-layout"
36078 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
36081 \begin_layout Standard
36082 \begin_inset Float figure
36089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36092 \begin_inset Tabular
36093 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
36094 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
36095 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36096 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36097 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36099 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
36111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36117 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36128 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36146 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36157 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36161 The normal text on the page goes here.
36162 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
36164 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
36165 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
36170 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36179 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36190 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36208 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36219 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36237 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36255 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36260 name "fig:Page-layout"
36264 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
36277 \begin_layout Standard
36278 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36286 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
36290 \begin_inset space ~
36295 is set to “Default”.
36296 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
36305 \begin_layout Subsection
36309 \begin_layout Standard
36310 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
36311 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
36312 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36313 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
36315 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
36317 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36320 \begin_layout Standard
36321 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36322 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36326 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36328 \begin_inset space ~
36336 \begin_layout Description
36339 thepage prints the current page number
36342 \begin_layout Description
36345 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
36348 \begin_layout Description
36351 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
36354 \begin_layout Description
36357 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36358 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
36361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36365 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36368 because it usually goes in a left header.
36371 \begin_layout Description
36374 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
36375 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
36377 It is normally used in the right header.
36380 \begin_layout Subsection
36381 Default header/footer
36384 \begin_layout Standard
36385 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
36386 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
36387 footer has the page number.
36388 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
36389 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
36390 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
36393 \begin_inset space ~
36401 \begin_layout Subsection
36405 \begin_layout Standard
36406 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
36407 Some pages are different.
36408 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
36409 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
36410 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
36411 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
36412 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
36415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36416 Header and footer decoration line
36419 \begin_layout Standard
36420 By default, you get a 0.4
36421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36424 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
36425 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
36437 in the following way:
36440 \begin_layout Standard
36447 headrulewidth}{thickness}
36450 \begin_layout Standard
36451 where thickness is a size in standard units like
36464 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
36465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36471 \begin_layout Standard
36472 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36474 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
36475 \begin_inset space ~
36479 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36489 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36490 Several header/footer lines
36493 \begin_layout Standard
36494 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
36495 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
36496 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
36498 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36513 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36514 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36516 \begin_inset space ~
36524 \begin_layout Standard
36531 headheight}{height}
36534 \begin_layout Standard
36539 is a size in standard units (e.
36540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36544 \begin_inset space \space{}
36552 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
36553 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
36554 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36555 logfile with the menu
36557 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36559 \begin_inset space ~
36567 \begin_inset space ~
36572 to see if you can find a warning about the package
36577 \begin_inset Index idx
36580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36582 packages ! fancyhdr
36588 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
36589 for your header/footer.
36592 \begin_layout Subsection
36596 \begin_layout Standard
36597 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
36598 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
36599 This example consists of the following definition:
36602 \begin_layout Description
36604 \begin_inset space ~
36613 , empty optional argument
36616 \begin_layout Description
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36621 Header empty, empty optional argument
36624 \begin_layout Description
36626 \begin_inset space ~
36635 in the optional argument
36638 \begin_layout Description
36640 \begin_inset space ~
36649 in the optional argument
36652 \begin_layout Description
36654 \begin_inset space ~
36667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36671 \begin_inset Newline newline
36675 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36682 in the optional argument
36685 \begin_layout Description
36687 \begin_inset space ~
36696 , empty optional argument
36699 \begin_layout Description
36702 headrulewidth set to 2
36703 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36709 \begin_layout Standard
36710 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
36711 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
36717 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36727 \begin_layout Standard
36728 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36734 \begin_layout Standard
36738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36742 pagestyle{headings}
36748 \begin_inset Note Note
36751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36752 switches back to page style with the default headings
36760 \begin_layout Section
36761 Previewing Snippets of your Document
36762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36764 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
36769 \begin_inset Index idx
36772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36779 \begin_inset Index idx
36782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36791 \begin_layout Standard
36793 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
36794 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
36795 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
36798 \begin_layout Subsection
36802 \begin_layout Standard
36803 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36809 \begin_inset Index idx
36812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36814 packages ! preview-latex
36819 (on some systems named simply
36824 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36826 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36833 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36835 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
36843 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
36844 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36845 -package are automatically
36846 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
36850 \begin_layout Subsection
36854 \begin_layout Standard
36855 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
36856 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36858 activate the option
36861 \begin_inset space ~
36868 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36874 \begin_inset space ~
36878 \begin_inset space ~
36881 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
36888 \begin_inset space ~
36901 \begin_inset space ~
36906 is the multiplication factor for the size.
36909 \begin_layout Standard
36910 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
36915 \begin_inset space ~
36923 \begin_inset space ~
36931 \begin_layout Standard
36932 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
36933 and when you finish
36937 \begin_layout Standard
36938 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36946 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
36947 generated by activating the option
36950 \begin_inset space ~
36956 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
36964 \begin_layout Subsection
36965 Selected document parts
36968 \begin_layout Standard
36969 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
36970 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
36971 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
36972 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36974 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
36976 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36980 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
36981 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
36982 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
36985 \begin_layout Standard
36986 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36993 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
36998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37005 is explained in section
37007 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
37012 \begin_inset space ~
37022 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
37023 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37024 the final rotated boxes,
37025 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
37026 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
37028 Here is the result:
37031 \begin_layout Standard
37032 \begin_inset Preview
37034 \begin_layout Standard
37039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37043 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
37049 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
37059 height_special "totalheight"
37064 backgroundcolor "none"
37067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37092 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
37098 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
37105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37120 \begin_layout Standard
37121 Previewing works also for colors.
37122 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37141 is explained in section
37148 \begin_inset space ~
37161 \begin_layout Standard
37162 \begin_inset Preview
37164 \begin_layout Standard
37168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37187 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37192 This is text within a colored, framed box.
37196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37211 \begin_layout Standard
37212 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37218 \begin_layout Standard
37219 If \SpecialChar LyX
37220 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
37221 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37222 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
37223 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37224 packages in your document preamble that are required by
37225 the \SpecialChar TeX
37227 If \SpecialChar LyX
37228 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
37229 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37231 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37232 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
37233 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37236 \begin_layout Subsection
37241 \begin_layout Standard
37242 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37243 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37246 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37248 \begin_inset space ~
37253 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37255 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
37257 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37258 's main window, then only this selection
37259 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37260 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
37261 the source view window.
37266 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
37267 ; but note that if you have
37268 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
37270 not just the one which is open at the time.
37273 \begin_layout Section
37274 Advanced Find and Replace
37275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37277 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37282 \begin_inset Index idx
37285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37292 \begin_inset Index idx
37295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37304 \begin_layout Subsection
37308 \begin_layout Standard
37309 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
37310 allows for searching of complex,
37311 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
37313 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
37314 The key-features are:
37317 \begin_layout Itemize
37318 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
37319 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
37320 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
37324 \begin_layout Itemize
37325 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
37326 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
37327 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
37328 a section heading will only be found within section headings
37331 \begin_layout Itemize
37332 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
37333 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
37334 outside of mathematics environments
37337 \begin_layout Itemize
37338 Search may be widened to a specific
37343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37347 \begin_inset space ~
37350 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
37351 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
37358 \begin_layout Itemize
37359 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
37360 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
37361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37365 \begin_inset space ~
37368 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
37371 \begin_layout Subsection
37375 \begin_layout Standard
37376 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
37378 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37391 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
37394 ) or the toolbar button
37397 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
37403 Advanced Find and Replace
37408 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37412 \begin_layout Standard
37418 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
37422 \begin_inset space ~
37427 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
37430 arg "paragraph-break"
37434 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
37435 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
37439 arg "paragraph-break"
37442 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
37446 searches backwards.
37449 \begin_layout Standard
37453 \begin_inset space ~
37458 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
37467 \begin_inset space ~
37472 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
37475 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37476 Searching for mathematics
37479 \begin_layout Standard
37480 Mathematical formulas, such as
37481 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
37484 or something more complex like
37485 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
37488 , may be searched for by typing them in the
37493 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
37494 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
37495 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
37496 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
37502 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37506 \begin_layout Standard
37507 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
37508 This is done by switching to the
37512 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
37517 This way, entering in the
37524 \begin_layout Itemize
37525 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
37526 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
37529 \begin_layout Itemize
37530 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
37531 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
37534 \begin_layout Itemize
37535 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
37536 of it only within section headings.
37537 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
37538 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
37542 \begin_layout Itemize
37543 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
37544 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
37547 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37551 \begin_layout Standard
37552 The entries made in the
37556 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
37559 \begin_inset space ~
37565 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
37569 button or alternatively press
37572 arg "paragraph-break"
37579 while the cursor is in the
37582 \begin_inset space ~
37590 \begin_layout Standard
37591 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
37593 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
37597 \begin_layout Itemize
37598 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
37599 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
37600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37607 with its typewriter version
37608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37616 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37622 \begin_layout Itemize
37623 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
37625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37629 \begin_inset Formula $R$
37633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37641 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
37645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37648 (you may want to enable the
37651 \begin_inset space ~
37659 \begin_inset space ~
37664 options and disable the
37672 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
37673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37680 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
37681 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
37685 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
37688 , or occurrences of
37689 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
37693 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
37699 \begin_layout Subsection
37703 \begin_layout Standard
37704 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
37708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37709 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
37711 \begin_inset CommandInset href
37713 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
37723 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
37729 This is done with the context menu
37731 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37732 Insert Regular Expression
37734 while the cursor is in the
37739 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
37740 expression matching rules
37744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37745 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
37748 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37752 \begin_inset space ~
37755 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
37756 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
37762 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
37763 same text in the document.
37764 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
37765 Examples of using such a feature may be:
37768 \begin_layout Enumerate
37769 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
37774 editor the fraction
37775 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
37779 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37782 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
37783 fractions with the given denominator.
37786 \begin_layout Enumerate
37787 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
37799 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37804 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
37805 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
37806 Also, by inserting a
37807 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
37810 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
37811 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
37814 \begin_layout Standard
37815 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
37816 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
37817 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37820 , and referring back to them through
37821 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37825 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
37829 For example, try searching with the regexp
37830 \begin_inset Newline newline
37833 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
37836 \begin_inset Newline newline
37839 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
37842 \begin_layout Standard
37843 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
37846 \begin_layout Standard
37847 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37855 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
37856 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
37857 sub-expressions is absolute.
37859 \begin_inset space ~
37863 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
37866 always refers to the first occurrence of
37867 \begin_inset Formula $()$
37870 in all entered regexps.
37878 \begin_layout Section
37880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37882 name "sec:Spellchecking"
37887 \begin_inset Index idx
37890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37899 \begin_layout Standard
37901 has a built-in spell checker.
37904 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37911 key or the toolbar button
37914 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
37917 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
37918 beginning of the currently selected text.
37919 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
37920 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
37921 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
37922 scrolled so that it is visible.
37923 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
37924 n, if any could be found.
37925 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
37929 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
37930 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
37933 \begin_layout Standard
37934 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
37937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37941 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
37942 a different one at the top of the dialog.
37944 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
37945 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
37948 \begin_inset space ~
37956 arg "dialog-show character"
37959 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
37961 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
37964 \begin_layout Standard
37965 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37966 can be downloaded from here:
37967 \begin_inset Newline newline
37971 \begin_inset Flex URL
37974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37976 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
37982 \begin_inset Newline newline
37986 \begin_inset space ~
37989 files for each language.
37990 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
37991 \begin_inset space ~
37994 files into \SpecialChar LyX
37995 's installation subfolder
38003 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38005 \begin_inset Newline newline
38008 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
38009 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
38010 but in most cases these are
38026 is the language code.
38029 \begin_layout Subsection
38033 \begin_layout Standard
38036 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38037 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38039 \begin_inset space ~
38042 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38045 you can set the following things:
38048 \begin_layout Description
38050 \begin_inset space ~
38053 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
38054 should use for spell checking.
38055 Depending on your platform,
38065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38066 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
38067 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
38082 \begin_inset space ~
38085 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
38088 \begin_layout Description
38090 \begin_inset space ~
38093 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
38094 will always use the given language
38095 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
38098 \begin_layout Description
38100 \begin_inset space ~
38103 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
38105 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38109 \begin_inset space \space{}
38113 This should normally not be needed.
38116 \begin_layout Description
38118 \begin_inset space ~
38122 \begin_inset space ~
38125 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
38127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38137 \begin_layout Description
38139 \begin_inset space ~
38142 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
38143 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
38144 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
38145 appear in a context menu.
38146 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
38150 \begin_layout Description
38152 \begin_inset space ~
38156 \begin_inset space ~
38160 \begin_inset space ~
38163 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
38167 \begin_layout Section
38169 \begin_inset Index idx
38172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38181 name "sec:Thesaurus"
38188 \begin_layout Standard
38190 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
38191 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
38200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38201 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38203 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
38213 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
38215 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
38216 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
38217 which are available for many languages.
38220 \begin_layout Standard
38221 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
38222 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
38226 \begin_layout Subsection
38227 Setting up the thesaurus
38230 \begin_layout Standard
38239 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
38243 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
38248 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
38250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38254 \begin_inset space ~
38262 For instance, the US English files are named:
38265 \begin_layout Itemize
38269 \begin_layout Itemize
38273 \begin_layout Standard
38282 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
38283 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
38286 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38287 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38288 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38290 \begin_inset space ~
38295 ) to the path where they are installed.
38299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38300 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
38301 ies, typical locations are
38307 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
38311 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
38315 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
38318 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
38324 LibreOffice-<Version>
38331 On the Mac, the default location is
38333 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
38334 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38335 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
38336 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
38337 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38338 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
38346 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
38347 during the \SpecialChar LyX
38348 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
38352 \begin_layout Standard
38353 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
38354 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
38356 \begin_inset Newline newline
38360 \begin_inset Flex URL
38363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38365 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
38373 \begin_layout Standard
38374 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
38375 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
38377 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38378 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38379 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38381 \begin_inset space ~
38386 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38388 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
38389 and point \SpecialChar LyX
38393 \begin_layout Standard
38394 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
38396 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
38399 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
38405 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
38408 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
38409 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
38411 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38417 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38418 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38419 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
38421 \begin_inset space ~
38426 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
38429 \begin_layout Subsection
38430 Using the thesaurus
38433 \begin_layout Standard
38434 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
38436 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38439 or the toolbar button
38442 arg "thesaurus-entry"
38445 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
38447 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
38449 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
38450 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
38451 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
38460 ), related terms (such as
38463 \begin_inset space ~
38472 ), compounds (such as
38475 \begin_inset space ~
38484 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
38493 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
38496 \begin_layout Standard
38497 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
38498 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
38502 \begin_layout Standard
38503 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
38504 the dictionary, such as the above
38508 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
38509 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38513 \begin_inset space \space{}
38516 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
38517 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
38518 For example, looking up the word form
38522 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
38527 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
38528 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38532 \begin_inset space \space{}
38543 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
38544 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
38545 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
38548 \begin_layout Section
38550 \begin_inset Index idx
38553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38560 \begin_inset Index idx
38563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38564 Document ! Change Tracking
38570 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38572 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
38579 \begin_layout Standard
38580 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
38581 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
38582 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
38583 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
38585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38587 \begin_inset space ~
38590 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38592 \begin_inset space ~
38600 \begin_layout Standard
38601 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
38615 The color depends on the author that made the change.
38616 You can change the color in
38618 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38619 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38621 \begin_inset space ~
38625 \begin_inset space ~
38630 \SpecialChar menuseparator
38636 \begin_inset Index idx
38639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38640 Color ! Change tracking
38645 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
38646 's status bar when the
38647 cursor is in changed text.
38648 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
38651 arg "changes-merge"
38657 \begin_layout Standard
38658 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
38660 \begin_inset Index idx
38663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38672 \begin_layout Standard
38673 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38679 \begin_layout Standard
38680 \begin_inset Graphics
38681 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
38689 \begin_layout Standard
38690 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38696 \begin_layout Standard
38697 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
38700 \begin_layout Standard
38701 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38707 \begin_layout Standard
38708 \begin_inset Tabular
38709 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
38710 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38711 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38712 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38713 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38714 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38722 arg "changes-track"
38730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38736 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38738 \begin_inset space ~
38741 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38743 \begin_inset space ~
38752 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38761 arg "changes-output"
38769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38775 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38777 \begin_inset space ~
38780 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38782 \begin_inset space ~
38786 \begin_inset space ~
38790 \begin_inset space ~
38799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38820 Jumps to the next change
38826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38835 arg "change-accept"
38843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38849 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38851 \begin_inset space ~
38854 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38856 \begin_inset space ~
38865 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38874 arg "change-reject"
38882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38888 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38890 \begin_inset space ~
38893 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38895 \begin_inset space ~
38904 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38913 arg "changes-merge"
38921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38929 \begin_inset space ~
38932 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38934 \begin_inset space ~
38943 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38952 arg "all-changes-accept"
38960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38966 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38968 \begin_inset space ~
38971 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
38973 \begin_inset space ~
38977 \begin_inset space ~
38986 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38995 arg "all-changes-reject"
39003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39009 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39011 \begin_inset space ~
39014 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39016 \begin_inset space ~
39020 \begin_inset space ~
39029 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39053 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39055 \begin_inset space ~
39064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39087 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
39089 \begin_inset space ~
39105 \begin_layout Standard
39106 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39112 \begin_layout Standard
39113 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
39133 \begin_layout Standard
39134 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
39135 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
39136 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
39137 the next change after the current cursor position.
39138 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
39139 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
39140 step to the next change.
39141 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
39144 \begin_layout Standard
39145 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
39146 to describe a change.
39149 \begin_layout Standard
39151 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
39152 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39158 \begin_inset Index idx
39161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39169 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
39171 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39178 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39184 \begin_layout Section
39185 Comparison of Documents
39186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39188 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
39193 \begin_inset Index idx
39196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39197 Comparison of documents
39205 \begin_layout Standard
39206 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
39209 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39213 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
39214 file with change tracking enabled showing the
39216 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
39218 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
39222 \begin_inset space ~
39226 \begin_inset space ~
39230 \begin_inset space ~
39239 \begin_inset space ~
39243 \begin_inset space ~
39247 \begin_inset space ~
39251 \begin_inset space ~
39255 \begin_inset space ~
39259 \begin_inset space ~
39264 enables the change tracking option
39267 \begin_inset space ~
39271 \begin_inset space ~
39275 \begin_inset space ~
39280 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
39283 \begin_layout Section
39284 International Support
39285 \begin_inset Index idx
39288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39289 International support
39297 \begin_layout Standard
39298 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
39299 with any language you want.
39300 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
39301 up \SpecialChar LyX
39303 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39305 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
39313 \begin_layout Standard
39314 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
39315 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
39316 \begin_inset space ~
39320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39322 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
39329 \begin_layout Subsection
39331 \begin_inset Index idx
39334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39341 \begin_inset Index idx
39344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39345 Document ! Settings
39351 \begin_inset Index idx
39354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39355 Document ! Language
39363 \begin_layout Standard
39366 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39367 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39370 dialog lets you set
39372 the language, the quote style and character encoding
39377 \begin_layout Standard
39382 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39387 \begin_inset space ~
39392 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
39393 For details about the different encoding options see section
39394 \begin_inset space ~
39398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39400 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
39407 \begin_layout Subsection
39408 Keyboard mapping configuration
39409 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39411 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
39418 \begin_layout Standard
39419 If you have for example a U.
39420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39423 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
39424 can use an alternate keymap.
39425 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
39430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39431 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39432 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
39435 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
39436 \begin_inset space ~
39440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39442 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
39447 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
39448 which one you want to use.
39451 \begin_layout Standard
39452 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
39453 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
39454 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
39455 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39458 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
39459 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
39460 one to support the characters you want.
39461 This and many other customizations are explained in the
39468 \begin_layout Chapter
39471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39473 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
39480 \begin_layout Standard
39481 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
39482 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
39483 topic inside the user's guide.
39486 \begin_layout Section
39488 \begin_inset Index idx
39491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39500 \begin_layout Standard
39505 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
39508 \begin_layout Subsection
39512 \begin_layout Standard
39513 Creates a new document.
39516 \begin_layout Subsection
39520 \begin_layout Standard
39521 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
39522 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
39523 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
39525 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
39526 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
39532 \begin_layout Subsection
39536 \begin_layout Standard
39540 \begin_layout Subsection
39544 \begin_layout Standard
39545 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
39546 Click there on a file to open it.
39549 \begin_layout Subsection
39551 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
39555 \begin_layout Standard
39557 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
39558 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
39562 \begin_layout Subsection
39566 \begin_layout Standard
39567 Closes the current document.
39570 \begin_layout Subsection
39574 \begin_layout Standard
39575 Closes all opened documents.
39578 \begin_layout Subsection
39582 \begin_layout Standard
39583 Saves the actual document.
39586 \begin_layout Subsection
39590 \begin_layout Standard
39591 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
39592 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
39596 \begin_layout Subsection
39598 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
39602 \begin_layout Standard
39604 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
39605 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
39611 \begin_layout Subsection
39615 \begin_layout Standard
39616 Saves all opened documents.
39619 \begin_layout Subsection
39623 \begin_layout Standard
39624 Reloads the actual document from disk.
39627 \begin_layout Subsection
39631 \begin_layout Standard
39632 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
39633 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
39634 It is described in the section
39636 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
39641 Additional Features
39646 \begin_layout Subsection
39650 \begin_layout Standard
39651 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
39652 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
39654 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
39655 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
39659 \begin_layout Standard
39660 When using the menu entry
39663 \begin_inset space ~
39668 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
39672 \begin_inset space ~
39676 \begin_inset space ~
39680 \begin_inset space ~
39685 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
39686 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
39689 \begin_layout Subsection
39691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39693 name "subsec:Export"
39700 \begin_layout Standard
39701 You can export your document to various file formats.
39702 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
39704 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
39705 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
39706 during its configuration.
39709 \begin_layout Standard
39710 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
39712 \begin_inset space ~
39716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39718 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
39725 \begin_layout Description
39731 \begin_inset space ~
39734 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
39736 \begin_inset space ~
39739 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
39740 \begin_inset Newline newline
39743 Since \SpecialChar LyX
39744 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
39748 \begin_layout Description
39749 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
39755 \begin_layout Description
39757 \begin_inset space ~
39760 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
39766 \begin_layout Description
39767 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
39768 's native DVI-format.
39769 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
39770 files paths or file names in your document.
39772 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
39779 \begin_layout Description
39780 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
39781 in files paths or file names
39784 \begin_layout Description
39786 \begin_inset space ~
39793 ) DVI-format using the program
39795 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39798 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
39802 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39810 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
39818 \begin_layout Description
39820 \begin_inset space ~
39823 (cropped) the same as
39827 but with cropped page margins.
39830 \begin_layout Description
39832 \begin_inset space ~
39835 Dot text file with code in the programming language
39839 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
39844 \begin_layout Description
39848 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39856 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
39864 \begin_layout Description
39866 \begin_inset space ~
39870 \begin_inset space ~
39873 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
39877 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
39885 \begin_layout Description
39889 \begin_inset space ~
39898 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39899 source that is compilable with the program
39901 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
39905 \begin_layout Description
39909 \begin_inset space ~
39914 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39915 source, additionally all images used in the document
39916 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
39920 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
39923 \begin_layout Description
39927 \begin_inset space ~
39932 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39933 source code, additionally all images used in the document
39934 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
39942 \begin_layout Description
39946 \begin_inset space ~
39955 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39956 source that is compilable with the program
39962 \begin_layout Description
39964 \begin_inset space ~
39968 \begin_inset space ~
39975 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39976 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
39982 \begin_layout Description
39984 \begin_inset space ~
39987 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
39988 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
39990 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39994 \begin_inset space \space{}
39999 \begin_inset space ~
40003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40018 represent the version number)
40021 \begin_layout Description
40023 \begin_inset space ~
40027 \begin_inset space ~
40030 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
40031 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
40032 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40036 \begin_layout Description
40037 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
40038 's internal XHTML engine
40041 \begin_layout Description
40043 \begin_inset space ~
40047 \begin_inset space ~
40051 \begin_inset space ~
40055 \begin_inset space ~
40058 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
40063 For the conversion the program
40072 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40075 \begin_layout Description
40076 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
40081 \begin_layout Description
40083 \begin_inset space ~
40086 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
40088 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
40091 For the conversion the program
40100 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40103 \begin_layout Description
40105 \begin_inset space ~
40108 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
40109 For the conversion the program
40118 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
40121 \begin_layout Description
40123 \begin_inset space ~
40126 (cropped) the same as
40129 \begin_inset space ~
40134 but with cropped page margins
40137 \begin_layout Description
40141 \begin_inset space ~
40146 PDF-format using the program
40150 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40153 \begin_layout Description
40157 \begin_inset space ~
40161 \begin_inset space ~
40169 \begin_inset space ~
40174 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
40175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40179 \begin_inset space \space{}
40182 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
40186 \begin_layout Description
40190 \begin_inset space ~
40195 PDF-format using the program
40197 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40200 , produces PDF-files directly
40203 \begin_layout Description
40207 \begin_inset space ~
40212 PDF-format using the program
40216 , produces PDF-files directly
40219 \begin_layout Description
40223 \begin_inset space ~
40228 PDF-format using the program
40232 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
40235 \begin_layout Description
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40244 PDF-format using the program
40249 , produces PDF-files directly
40252 \begin_layout Description
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40264 \begin_layout Description
40268 \begin_inset space ~
40272 \begin_inset space ~
40277 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
40278 and then exported as text using the program
40283 \begin_layout Description
40288 PostScript format using the program
40296 options see section
40297 \begin_inset space ~
40301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40303 reference "subsec:General-output"
40310 \begin_layout Description
40311 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40312 source and also code in the statistical programming
40326 it is possible to use
40330 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
40334 \begin_layout Standard
40335 If one of the menu entries
40342 \begin_inset space ~
40351 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40353 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40355 \begin_inset space ~
40359 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40361 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40366 \begin_inset Index idx
40369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40370 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40379 \begin_layout Subsection
40383 \begin_layout Standard
40384 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
40385 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
40388 \begin_inset space ~
40392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40394 reference "sec:Paths"
40399 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
40408 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
40409 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
40410 's preferences as described in section
40411 \begin_inset space ~
40415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40417 reference "subsec:Converters"
40424 \begin_layout Subsection
40425 New and Close Window
40428 \begin_layout Standard
40429 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
40433 \begin_layout Subsection
40437 \begin_layout Standard
40438 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
40441 \begin_layout Section
40443 \begin_inset Index idx
40446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40455 \begin_layout Subsection
40459 \begin_layout Standard
40460 Described in section
40461 \begin_inset space ~
40465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40467 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
40474 \begin_layout Subsection
40475 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
40478 \begin_layout Standard
40479 Described in section
40480 \begin_inset space ~
40484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40486 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40493 \begin_layout Subsection
40497 \begin_layout Standard
40498 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
40499 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
40502 \begin_layout Subsection
40506 \begin_layout Standard
40507 Selects the whole document.
40510 \begin_layout Subsection
40511 Find & Replace (Quick)
40514 \begin_layout Standard
40515 Described in section
40516 \begin_inset space ~
40520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40522 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
40529 \begin_layout Subsection
40530 Find & Replace (Advanced)
40533 \begin_layout Standard
40534 Described in section
40535 \begin_inset space ~
40539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40541 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
40548 \begin_layout Subsection
40549 Move Paragraph Up/Down
40552 \begin_layout Standard
40553 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
40557 \begin_layout Subsection
40559 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40563 \begin_layout Standard
40565 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
40566 Described in section
40567 \begin_inset space ~
40571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40573 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40582 \begin_layout Subsection
40584 \begin_inset Index idx
40587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40588 Paragraph ! Settings
40596 \begin_layout Standard
40597 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
40598 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
40602 \begin_layout Standard
40603 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
40604 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
40610 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40611 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40613 \begin_inset space ~
40619 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
40623 \begin_layout Subsection
40625 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
40629 \begin_layout Standard
40631 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40632 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
40637 \begin_layout Enumerate
40639 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
40640 Customize text properties by means of the
40646 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
40649 ; this is described in section
40650 \begin_inset space ~
40654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40656 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
40663 \begin_layout Enumerate
40665 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
40666 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
40668 Apply last settings
40671 \begin_layout Enumerate
40673 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
40674 Change the casing of selected text (
40689 \begin_layout Subsection
40691 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
40695 \begin_layout Standard
40697 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
40698 This sub-menu only appears the document class or a module provides custom
40699 text styles (in the case of this document:
40721 \begin_inset space ~
40725 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40727 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
40736 \begin_layout Subsection
40737 Table and Rows & Columns
40740 \begin_layout Standard
40741 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
40742 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
40743 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
40746 \begin_layout Subsection
40750 \begin_layout Standard
40751 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
40752 It will dissolve this inset.
40753 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
40757 \begin_layout Subsection
40761 \begin_layout Standard
40762 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
40763 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
40766 \begin_layout Subsection
40767 Increase/Decrease List Depth
40770 \begin_layout Standard
40771 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
40773 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
40774 \begin_inset space ~
40778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40780 reference "sec:Nesting"
40785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40787 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
40794 \begin_layout Section
40796 \begin_inset Index idx
40799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40808 \begin_layout Standard
40809 At the bottom of the
40813 menu the opened documents are listed.
40816 \begin_layout Subsection
40817 Open/Close all Insets
40820 \begin_layout Standard
40821 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
40824 \begin_layout Subsection
40825 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
40828 \begin_layout Standard
40829 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
40832 \begin_layout Standard
40833 Math macros are described in the
40840 \begin_layout Subsection
40844 \begin_layout Standard
40845 Shows the outline window as described in sections
40846 \begin_inset space ~
40850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40852 reference "sec:Navigating"
40857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40859 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
40866 \begin_layout Subsection
40870 \begin_layout Standard
40871 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40879 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
40886 \begin_layout Subsection
40890 \begin_layout Standard
40891 Opens a window showing console messages.
40892 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
40894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40897 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
40898 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
40899 is processing the document.
40902 \begin_layout Subsection
40904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40906 name "subsec:Toolbars"
40911 \begin_inset Index idx
40914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40923 \begin_layout Standard
40924 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
40926 All toolbars and the
40929 \begin_inset space ~
40934 can be turned on and off.
40939 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
40951 \begin_inset space ~
40963 \begin_inset space ~
40968 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
40972 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
40979 \begin_layout Standard
40984 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
40988 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
40989 or when a certain feature is enabled.
40990 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
40991 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
40992 is inside a formula or table respectively.
40995 \begin_layout Standard
40997 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
40998 \begin_inset space ~
41002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41004 reference "sec:Toolbars"
41011 \begin_layout Subsection
41015 \begin_layout Standard
41019 \begin_inset space ~
41023 \begin_inset space ~
41027 \begin_inset space ~
41031 \begin_inset space ~
41035 \begin_inset space ~
41039 \begin_inset space ~
41044 will split \SpecialChar LyX
41045 's main window vertically while
41048 \begin_inset space ~
41052 \begin_inset space ~
41056 \begin_inset space ~
41060 \begin_inset space ~
41064 \begin_inset space ~
41068 \begin_inset space ~
41073 will split it horizontally.
41074 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
41075 to view the same document, but at different positions.
41076 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
41077 three or more documents at the same time.
41078 To close a split view, use the menu
41081 \begin_inset space ~
41085 \begin_inset space ~
41093 \begin_layout Subsection
41097 \begin_layout Standard
41098 Closes a split view.
41101 \begin_layout Subsection
41105 \begin_layout Standard
41106 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
41107 so that you will see nothing but your text.
41108 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
41109 's main window fullscreen.
41110 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
41111 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
41114 \begin_layout Section
41116 \begin_inset Index idx
41119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41128 \begin_layout Subsection
41132 \begin_layout Standard
41133 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
41134 \begin_inset space ~
41138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41140 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
41151 \begin_layout Subsection
41153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41155 name "subsec:Special-Character"
41162 \begin_layout Standard
41163 Here you can insert the following characters:
41166 \begin_layout Description
41171 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
41174 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
41175 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41176 -packages you have installed.
41177 You can get a complete display by checking
41180 \begin_inset space ~
41186 \begin_inset Newline newline
41190 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41198 Not all characters will be visible in the
41202 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
41203 dialog (see section
41204 \begin_inset space ~
41208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41210 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
41214 ) can display every character.
41222 \begin_layout Description
41223 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
41227 \begin_layout Description
41229 \begin_inset space ~
41233 \begin_inset space ~
41236 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
41237 \begin_inset space ~
41241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41243 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
41250 \begin_layout Description
41252 \begin_inset space ~
41255 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
41258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41259 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41265 \begin_layout Description
41267 \begin_inset space ~
41270 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
41273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41274 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41280 \begin_layout Description
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41285 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
41289 \begin_layout Description
41291 \begin_inset space ~
41294 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
41298 \begin_layout Description
41300 \begin_inset space ~
41304 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
41305 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
41311 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41316 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41322 \begin_inset space \space{}
41325 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41326 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41335 To insert a fraction use the command
41340 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41344 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41350 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41353 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41360 \begin_layout Description
41362 \begin_inset space ~
41365 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
41369 \begin_layout Description
41371 \begin_inset space ~
41375 \begin_inset Index idx
41378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41385 \begin_inset Index idx
41388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41389 Language ! Phonetic symbols
41394 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
41395 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
41397 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41403 \begin_inset Index idx
41406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41414 \begin_inset Newline newline
41417 More information about this feature can be found in the
41423 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
41429 \begin_layout Description
41430 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
41432 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
41433 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
41437 \begin_layout Subsection
41441 \begin_layout Standard
41442 Opens a submenu with the following options:
41445 \begin_layout Description
41446 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
41447 \begin_inset script superscript
41449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41458 \begin_layout Description
41459 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
41460 \begin_inset script subscript
41462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41471 \begin_layout Description
41473 \begin_inset space ~
41476 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
41477 \begin_inset space ~
41481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41483 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
41490 \begin_layout Description
41492 \begin_inset space ~
41495 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
41496 \begin_inset space ~
41500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41502 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
41509 \begin_layout Description
41511 \begin_inset space ~
41514 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
41515 \begin_inset space ~
41519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41521 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
41528 \begin_layout Description
41530 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
41532 \begin_inset space ~
41535 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
41537 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41541 \begin_inset space \space{}
41544 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
41545 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
41551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41554 To insert a fraction use the command
41559 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
41563 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
41569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41572 The visible space is hereby the character before the
41581 \begin_layout Description
41583 \begin_inset space ~
41586 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41593 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
41600 \begin_layout Description
41602 \begin_inset space ~
41605 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
41606 \begin_inset space ~
41610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41612 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
41619 \begin_layout Description
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41624 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
41625 \begin_inset space ~
41629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41631 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
41638 \begin_layout Description
41639 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
41640 \begin_inset space ~
41644 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41646 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
41653 \begin_layout Description
41655 \begin_inset space ~
41658 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
41659 \begin_inset space ~
41663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41665 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
41672 \begin_layout Description
41674 \begin_inset space ~
41677 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
41678 \begin_inset space ~
41682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41684 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
41691 \begin_layout Description
41693 \begin_inset space ~
41697 \begin_inset space ~
41700 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
41703 \begin_inset space ~
41707 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41709 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
41716 for a usage example.
41719 \begin_layout Description
41721 \begin_inset space ~
41725 \begin_inset space ~
41728 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
41729 \begin_inset space ~
41733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41735 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41742 \begin_layout Description
41744 \begin_inset space ~
41747 Break Inserts a forced line break that
41748 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
41751 justifies the remaining text as described in section
41752 \begin_inset space ~
41756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41758 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
41765 \begin_layout Description
41767 \begin_inset space ~
41770 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
41771 \begin_inset space ~
41775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41777 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41784 \begin_layout Description
41786 \begin_inset space ~
41789 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
41790 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
41792 \begin_inset space ~
41796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41798 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
41805 \begin_layout Description
41807 \begin_inset space ~
41810 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
41811 \begin_inset space ~
41815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41817 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41824 \begin_layout Description
41826 \begin_inset space ~
41830 \begin_inset space ~
41833 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
41834 \begin_inset space ~
41838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41840 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
41847 \begin_layout Subsection
41849 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459357
41853 \begin_layout Standard
41855 \change_inserted -712698321 1533459959
41856 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
41857 The submenu allows you to insert
41860 \begin_layout Description
41862 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460018
41864 \begin_inset space ~
41867 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
41870 \begin_layout Description
41872 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460347
41874 \begin_inset space ~
41878 \begin_inset space ~
41881 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
41885 \begin_layout Description
41887 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647074
41889 \begin_inset space ~
41892 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
41895 \begin_layout Description
41897 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647089
41899 \begin_inset space ~
41902 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
41905 \begin_layout Description
41907 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647093
41909 \begin_inset space ~
41913 \begin_inset space ~
41916 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
41920 \begin_layout Description
41922 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647133
41924 \begin_inset space ~
41927 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
41930 \begin_layout Description
41932 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647170
41934 \begin_inset space ~
41938 \begin_inset space ~
41942 \begin_inset space ~
41945 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
41948 \begin_layout Description
41950 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647240
41952 \begin_inset space ~
41955 Name inserts the user name as specified in
41957 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41958 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41964 \begin_layout Description
41966 \change_inserted -712698321 1533647259
41968 \begin_inset space ~
41971 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
41973 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41974 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41980 \begin_layout Description
41982 \change_inserted -712698321 1533460561
41983 Other\SpecialChar ldots
41984 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
41985 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
41988 \begin_layout Subsection
41991 List/Contents/References
41994 \begin_layout Standard
41995 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
41999 \begin_inset space ~
42020 are described in section
42021 \begin_inset space ~
42025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42027 reference "sec:toc"
42036 is described in section
42037 \begin_inset space ~
42041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42043 reference "sec:Index"
42051 is described in section
42052 \begin_inset space ~
42056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42058 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42064 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42067 is described in section
42068 \begin_inset space ~
42072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42074 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
42081 \begin_layout Subsection
42085 \begin_layout Standard
42086 To insert floats, as described in section
42087 \begin_inset space ~
42091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42093 reference "sec:Floats"
42097 and in detail the chapter
42104 \begin_inset space ~
42112 \begin_layout Subsection
42116 \begin_layout Standard
42117 To insert notes, described in section
42118 \begin_inset space ~
42122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42124 reference "sec:Notes"
42131 \begin_layout Subsection
42135 \begin_layout Standard
42136 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
42138 Branches are described in section
42139 \begin_inset space ~
42143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42145 reference "sec:Branches"
42152 \begin_layout Subsection
42156 \begin_layout Standard
42157 Inserts document class-specific insets.
42158 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
42160 An example is the document class
42161 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
42163 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42171 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
42175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42180 with three custom insets.
42183 Flex insets and InsetLayout
42187 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
42193 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
42196 \begin_layout Subsection
42198 \begin_inset Index idx
42201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42210 \begin_layout Standard
42211 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
42213 For more information see chapter
42215 External Document Parts
42218 \begin_inset space ~
42224 \begin_layout Subsection
42226 \begin_inset Index idx
42229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42238 \begin_layout Standard
42239 Inserts a box in a certain style.
42240 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
42247 \begin_inset space ~
42255 \begin_layout Subsection
42259 \begin_layout Standard
42264 dialog as described in section
42265 \begin_inset space ~
42269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42271 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42278 \begin_layout Subsection
42282 \begin_layout Standard
42287 as described in section
42288 \begin_inset space ~
42292 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42294 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42301 \begin_layout Subsection
42305 \begin_layout Standard
42310 as described in section
42311 \begin_inset space ~
42315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42317 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42324 \begin_layout Subsection
42326 \begin_inset Index idx
42329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42336 \begin_inset Index idx
42339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42340 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
42348 \begin_layout Standard
42349 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
42350 Floats are described in section
42351 \begin_inset space ~
42355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42357 reference "sec:Floats"
42361 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
42364 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
42372 \begin_inset space ~
42380 \begin_layout Subsection
42384 \begin_layout Standard
42385 Inserts an index entry as described in section
42386 \begin_inset space ~
42390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42392 reference "sec:Index"
42399 \begin_layout Subsection
42403 \begin_layout Standard
42404 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
42405 \begin_inset space ~
42409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42411 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
42418 \begin_layout Subsection
42422 \begin_layout Standard
42423 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
42424 Tables are described in section
42425 \begin_inset space ~
42429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42431 reference "sec:Tables"
42435 and in detail in the chapter
42442 \begin_inset space ~
42450 \begin_layout Subsection
42454 \begin_layout Standard
42460 Graphics are described in section
42461 \begin_inset space ~
42465 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42467 reference "sec:Graphics"
42474 \begin_layout Subsection
42478 \begin_layout Standard
42479 Inserts a URL as described in section
42480 \begin_inset space ~
42484 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42486 reference "subsec:URLs"
42493 \begin_layout Subsection
42497 \begin_layout Standard
42498 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
42499 \begin_inset space ~
42503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42505 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
42512 \begin_layout Subsection
42516 \begin_layout Standard
42517 Inserts a footnote as described in section
42518 \begin_inset space ~
42522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42524 reference "sec:Footnotes"
42531 \begin_layout Subsection
42535 \begin_layout Standard
42536 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
42537 \begin_inset space ~
42541 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42543 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
42550 \begin_layout Subsection
42553 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
42556 \begin_layout Standard
42557 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
42558 environments of the same type.
42560 \begin_inset space ~
42564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42566 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
42570 for an explanation.
42573 \begin_layout Subsection
42577 \begin_layout Standard
42578 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
42579 title or caption of a float.
42580 Inserts a short title as described in section
42581 \begin_inset space ~
42585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42587 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
42594 \begin_layout Subsection
42599 \begin_layout Standard
42600 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
42601 Code box as described in section
42602 \begin_inset space ~
42606 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42608 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42615 \begin_layout Subsection
42617 \begin_inset Index idx
42620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42629 \begin_layout Standard
42630 Inserts a program listings box.
42631 Program listings are explained in the chapter
42633 Program Code Listings
42638 \begin_inset space ~
42646 \begin_layout Subsection
42648 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42652 \begin_layout Standard
42654 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
42655 Inserts the actual date.
42656 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
42663 \begin_layout Subsection
42667 \begin_layout Standard
42668 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
42669 \begin_inset space ~
42673 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42675 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42682 \begin_layout Section
42684 \begin_inset Index idx
42687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42696 \begin_layout Standard
42697 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
42698 \begin_inset space ~
42701 of the current document.
42702 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
42705 \begin_layout Subsection
42709 \begin_layout Standard
42710 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
42711 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
42712 to jump, for example, between section
42713 \begin_inset space ~
42717 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
42718 \begin_inset space ~
42721 2.5 and use the submenu
42724 \begin_inset space ~
42728 \begin_inset space ~
42735 \begin_inset space ~
42741 \begin_inset space ~
42745 \begin_inset space ~
42751 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
42755 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
42761 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
42764 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
42767 \begin_layout Standard
42768 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
42772 \begin_inset space ~
42777 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
42780 \begin_inset space ~
42785 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
42788 \begin_layout Subsection
42789 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
42792 \begin_layout Standard
42793 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
42797 \begin_layout Subsection
42801 \begin_layout Standard
42802 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
42803 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
42804 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
42808 \begin_inset space ~
42812 \begin_inset space ~
42820 \begin_layout Subsection
42824 \begin_layout Standard
42825 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
42828 The \SpecialChar LyX
42829 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
42831 \begin_inset space ~
42839 \begin_inset space ~
42844 manual for a detailed description.
42847 \begin_layout Section
42849 \begin_inset Index idx
42852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42861 \begin_layout Subsection
42865 \begin_layout Standard
42866 Change Tracking is described in section
42867 \begin_inset space ~
42871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42873 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42880 \begin_layout Subsection
42888 \begin_layout Standard
42889 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
42890 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
42891 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42893 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
42894 to the clipboard or update the view.
42895 \begin_inset Newline newline
42898 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42902 \begin_layout Standard
42905 Open Containing Directory
42907 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
42908 's temporary folder for the document.
42909 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
42910 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
42911 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
42912 For example some journals require to send the
42916 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
42920 \begin_layout Subsection
42921 Start Appendix Here
42924 \begin_layout Standard
42925 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
42926 as described in section
42927 \begin_inset space ~
42931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42933 reference "sec:Appendices"
42940 \begin_layout Subsection
42942 \begin_inset space ~
42948 \begin_layout Standard
42949 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
42950 default output format for the document (menu
42952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42953 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42954 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42956 \begin_inset space ~
42960 \begin_inset space ~
42966 \begin_inset space ~
42970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42972 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
42976 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
42979 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42980 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42982 \begin_inset space ~
42985 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42987 \begin_inset space ~
42990 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
42992 \begin_inset space ~
42996 \begin_inset space ~
43002 \begin_inset space ~
43006 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43008 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43012 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
43013 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43015 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43016 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43018 \begin_inset space ~
43021 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43023 \begin_inset space ~
43026 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43030 \begin_inset space ~
43034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43036 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43041 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43042 when it is first configured.
43043 The default output format is
43046 \begin_inset space ~
43054 \begin_layout Subsection
43055 View (Other Formats)
43058 \begin_layout Standard
43059 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
43060 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
43061 actual document with an external program.
43062 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
43063 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43064 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
43066 All possible formats are listed in section
43067 \begin_inset space ~
43071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43073 reference "subsec:Export"
43078 You should at least see the menu entry
43083 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43085 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
43087 \begin_inset space ~
43091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43093 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43098 \begin_inset Index idx
43101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43102 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43111 \begin_layout Standard
43112 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
43113 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
43115 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43116 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43118 \begin_inset space ~
43121 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43123 \begin_inset space ~
43126 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43130 \begin_inset space ~
43134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43136 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43141 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
43142 when it is first configured.
43145 \begin_layout Subsection
43147 \begin_inset space ~
43153 \begin_layout Standard
43154 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
43155 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
43158 \begin_layout Subsection
43159 Update (Other Formats)
43162 \begin_layout Standard
43163 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
43164 your document without opening a new viewer window.
43167 \begin_layout Subsection
43168 View Master Document
43171 \begin_layout Standard
43172 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43174 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43188 \begin_inset space ~
43193 manual for more information on this topic).
43194 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
43195 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
43199 \begin_inset space ~
43203 \begin_inset space ~
43208 generates the output of the whole book, while
43212 will just output the chapter alone.
43215 \begin_layout Standard
43216 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43217 in the document settings (menu
43219 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43220 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43221 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43223 \begin_inset space ~
43227 \begin_inset space ~
43233 \begin_inset space ~
43237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43239 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43243 ) or in the preferences (menu
43245 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43246 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43248 \begin_inset space ~
43251 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43253 \begin_inset space ~
43256 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43258 \begin_inset space ~
43262 \begin_inset space ~
43268 \begin_inset space ~
43272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43274 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43281 \begin_layout Subsection
43282 Update Master Document
43285 \begin_layout Standard
43286 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
43288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43302 \begin_inset space ~
43307 manual for more information on this topic).
43308 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
43309 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
43312 \begin_layout Standard
43313 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
43314 in the document settings (menu
43316 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43317 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43318 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
43320 \begin_inset space ~
43324 \begin_inset space ~
43330 \begin_inset space ~
43334 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43336 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
43340 ) or in the preferences (menu
43342 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43343 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43345 \begin_inset space ~
43348 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
43350 \begin_inset space ~
43353 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
43355 \begin_inset space ~
43359 \begin_inset space ~
43365 \begin_inset space ~
43369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43371 reference "sec:File-Formats"
43378 \begin_layout Subsection
43380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43382 name "subsec:Compressed"
43389 \begin_layout Standard
43390 Un/compresses the current document.
43391 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
43392 compression (see the
43394 Additional Features
43396 manual for details).
43399 \begin_layout Subsection
43403 \begin_layout Standard
43404 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
43407 \begin_layout Subsection
43411 \begin_layout Standard
43412 The document settings are described in appendix
43413 \begin_inset space ~
43417 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43419 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43426 \begin_layout Section
43428 \begin_inset Index idx
43431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43440 \begin_layout Subsection
43444 \begin_layout Standard
43445 Spell checking is explained in section
43446 \begin_inset space ~
43450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43452 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
43459 \begin_layout Subsection
43463 \begin_layout Standard
43464 The thesaurus is described in section
43465 \begin_inset space ~
43469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43471 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
43478 \begin_layout Subsection
43480 \begin_inset Index idx
43483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43490 \begin_inset Index idx
43493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43502 \begin_layout Standard
43503 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
43504 the highlighted document part.
43507 \begin_layout Subsection
43513 \begin_inset Index idx
43516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43517 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43526 \begin_layout Standard
43527 Generates with the help of the program
43529 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
43532 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
43533 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
43534 This feature is not available on Windows.
43537 \begin_layout Subsection
43543 \begin_inset Index idx
43546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43556 \begin_layout Standard
43557 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43562 \begin_inset space ~
43567 to see the full filename paths.
43570 \begin_layout Subsection
43572 \begin_inset Index idx
43575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43584 \begin_layout Standard
43585 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
43586 files as described in section
43587 \begin_inset space ~
43591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43593 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
43600 \begin_layout Subsection
43602 \begin_inset Index idx
43605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43618 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43636 \begin_inset Index idx
43639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43640 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
43649 \begin_layout Standard
43650 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
43651 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
43652 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43653 -packages and programs it needs; see
43655 \begin_inset space ~
43659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43661 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
43668 \begin_layout Subsection
43672 \begin_layout Standard
43677 dialog as described in detail in appendix
43678 \begin_inset space ~
43682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43684 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43691 \begin_layout Section
43693 \begin_inset Index idx
43696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43705 \begin_layout Standard
43706 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
43707 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
43709 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
43713 \begin_layout Standard
43717 \begin_inset space ~
43722 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
43723 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43724 packages and classes found
43725 by \SpecialChar LyX
43727 \begin_inset space ~
43731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43733 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
43740 \begin_layout Standard
43744 \begin_inset space ~
43749 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
43754 \begin_layout Section
43756 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43758 name "sec:Toolbars"
43765 \begin_layout Standard
43766 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
43767 \begin_inset space ~
43771 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43773 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
43780 \begin_layout Standard
43781 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
43782 This is described in the
43784 Additional Features
43789 \begin_layout Subsection
43791 \begin_inset Index idx
43794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43803 \begin_layout Standard
43804 \begin_inset Graphics
43805 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
43813 \begin_layout Standard
43814 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43820 \begin_layout Standard
43821 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
43826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43838 \begin_inset Note Note
43841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43842 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
43847 manual for more information.
43855 \begin_layout Standard
43856 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
43862 \begin_layout Standard
43863 \begin_inset Tabular
43864 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
43865 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43866 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43867 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
43869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43873 \begin_inset Graphics
43874 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
43884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43888 pull-down box for the environments
43901 \begin_layout Standard
43902 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
43908 \begin_layout Standard
43910 \begin_inset Tabular
43911 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
43912 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
43913 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43914 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
43915 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43938 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43945 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43968 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43975 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
43976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43998 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44005 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44014 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
44022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44028 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44035 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44044 arg "spelling-continuously"
44052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44056 Spellcheck continuously
44062 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44085 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44092 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44115 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44122 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44145 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44152 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44175 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44182 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44205 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44207 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
44212 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44221 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44230 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
44238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44244 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44246 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44263 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44270 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44284 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44294 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44303 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44312 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
44320 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44326 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
44327 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
44334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44355 Emphasize text, function of the
44356 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
44359 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44361 \begin_inset space ~
44364 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44366 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
44372 arg "dialog-show character"
44383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44404 Set text to noun style, function of the
44405 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
44408 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44410 \begin_inset space ~
44413 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44415 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
44421 arg "dialog-show character"
44432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44438 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
44441 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
44449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44454 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
44457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44470 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
44475 arg "textstyle-apply"
44485 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44490 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
44491 Format text using the current settings in the
44493 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44495 \begin_inset space ~
44498 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
44509 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44532 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44533 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
44535 \begin_inset space ~
44544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44553 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
44561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44574 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44581 arg "tabular-insert"
44589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44595 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44602 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44608 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
44611 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
44619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44624 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
44627 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44634 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44643 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
44651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44655 Toggle outline window on/off,
44657 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44664 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44673 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
44681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44685 Toggle math toolbar on/off
44691 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44700 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
44708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44712 Toggle table toolbar on/off
44725 \begin_layout Subsection
44727 \begin_inset Index idx
44730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44739 \begin_layout Standard
44740 \begin_inset Graphics
44741 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
44749 \begin_layout Standard
44750 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44756 \begin_layout Standard
44757 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
44761 \begin_layout Standard
44762 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
44768 \begin_layout Standard
44769 \begin_inset Tabular
44770 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
44771 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
44772 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44773 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
44774 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44801 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44810 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
44818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44828 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44837 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
44845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44855 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44864 arg "layout-toggle List"
44872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44882 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44891 arg "layout-toggle Description"
44899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44909 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44918 arg "depth-increment"
44926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44932 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44934 \begin_inset space ~
44938 \begin_inset space ~
44947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44956 arg "depth-decrement"
44964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44970 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44972 \begin_inset space ~
44976 \begin_inset space ~
44985 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
44986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
44989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44994 arg "float-insert figure"
45002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45009 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45016 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45025 arg "float-insert table"
45033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45039 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45040 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
45047 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45070 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45086 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
45094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45107 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45116 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
45124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45130 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45137 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45160 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45162 \begin_inset space ~
45171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45180 arg "nomencl-insert"
45188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45196 \begin_inset space ~
45205 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45214 arg "footnote-insert"
45222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45228 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45235 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45244 arg "marginalnote-insert"
45252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45260 \begin_inset space ~
45269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45293 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
45295 \begin_inset space ~
45304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45313 arg "box-insert Frameless"
45321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45327 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45387 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45389 \begin_inset space ~
45398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45407 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
45415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45421 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45422 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45429 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45438 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
45446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45453 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45455 \begin_inset space ~
45464 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45473 arg "dialog-show character"
45481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45487 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45489 \begin_inset space ~
45492 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45499 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45505 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
45510 arg "textstyle-apply"
45518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45523 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
45524 Format text using the recent settings in the
45527 arg "dialog-show character"
45536 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45545 arg "layout-paragraph"
45553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45559 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45561 \begin_inset space ~
45570 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45579 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45593 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45607 \begin_layout Subsection
45608 View/Update Toolbar
45609 \begin_inset Index idx
45612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45613 Toolbar ! View / Update
45621 \begin_layout Standard
45622 \begin_inset Graphics
45623 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
45630 \begin_layout Standard
45631 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45637 \begin_layout Standard
45638 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45642 \begin_layout Standard
45643 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45649 \begin_layout Standard
45650 \begin_inset Tabular
45651 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
45652 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45653 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45654 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45655 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45678 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45685 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45686 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45694 arg "buffer-update"
45702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45708 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45715 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45724 arg "master-buffer-view"
45732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45738 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45740 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
45742 \begin_inset space ~
45748 \begin_inset space ~
45757 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45766 arg "master-buffer-update"
45774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45780 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45782 \begin_inset space ~
45786 \begin_inset space ~
45795 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45804 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
45812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45818 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45819 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45821 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
45823 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
45826 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45827 Synchronize with Output
45833 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45844 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
45854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45860 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45861 View (Other Formats)
45867 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45874 arg "update-others"
45878 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
45886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45893 Update (Other Formats)
45906 \begin_layout Standard
45908 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
45909 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
45915 \begin_layout Subsection
45919 \begin_layout Standard
45920 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
45921 \begin_inset space ~
45925 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45927 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
45931 , the table toolbar
45932 \begin_inset Index idx
45935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45944 \begin_inset space ~
45949 manual and the math macro toolbar
45950 \begin_inset Index idx
45953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45966 \begin_layout Chapter
45967 The Document Settings
45968 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45970 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
45975 \begin_inset Index idx
45978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45979 Document ! Settings
45987 \begin_layout Standard
45991 \begin_inset space ~
45996 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
45997 is called with the menu
45999 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46003 You can save your document settings as default with the
46005 Save as Document Defaults
46007 button in any dialog.
46008 This will create a template named
46012 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
46013 when you create a new document without
46017 \begin_layout Standard
46022 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
46023 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
46026 \begin_layout Standard
46027 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
46028 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
46029 to find the one you are looking for.
46030 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
46031 the submenus of the dialog.
46033 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46037 \begin_inset space \space{}
46041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46048 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
46049 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
46050 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
46053 \begin_layout Section
46057 \begin_layout Standard
46058 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
46060 Document classes are described in section
46061 \begin_inset space ~
46065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46067 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
46074 \begin_layout Standard
46078 \begin_inset space ~
46083 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
46088 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
46089 as a layout for a document class.
46090 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
46092 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
46101 \begin_layout Standard
46102 Some classes use special class options by default.
46103 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
46107 and you can decide to use them or not.
46108 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
46109 recommended you leave them untouched.
46114 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
46115 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
46120 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46122 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
46127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46128 When you want to use one of the following drivers
46129 \begin_inset Newline newline
46134 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
46137 \begin_inset Newline newline
46140 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46141 distribution, see section
46146 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46148 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
46161 \begin_layout Standard
46166 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
46167 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
46168 in the background if the child document
46169 is opened without its master.
46170 This way child documents are always compilable.
46171 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
46178 \begin_inset space ~
46186 \begin_layout Standard
46187 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46198 \begin_inset Index idx
46201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46203 packages ! prettyref
46209 \begin_inset Index idx
46212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46214 packages ! refstyle
46219 for cross-references, see section
46220 \begin_inset space ~
46224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46226 reference "sec:Cross-References"
46233 \begin_layout Section
46237 \begin_layout Standard
46238 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
46239 Please refer to the section
46242 \begin_inset space ~
46250 \begin_inset space ~
46255 manual for details.
46258 \begin_layout Section
46262 \begin_layout Standard
46263 Modules are explained in section
46264 \begin_inset space ~
46268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46270 reference "subsec:Modules"
46277 \begin_layout Section
46281 \begin_layout Standard
46283 \begin_inset space ~
46287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46289 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
46296 \begin_layout Section
46300 \begin_layout Standard
46301 The document font settings are described in section
46302 \begin_inset space ~
46306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46308 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
46315 \begin_layout Section
46319 \begin_layout Standard
46320 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
46332 \begin_inset space ~
46337 and whether it should be a
46340 \begin_inset space ~
46345 can also be specified here.
46348 \begin_layout Standard
46349 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
46350 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
46351 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
46353 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
46356 \begin_layout Standard
46359 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
46362 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
46363 justifies the text on screen.
46364 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
46366 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
46370 \begin_layout Standard
46372 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
46381 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
46386 \begin_layout Section
46390 \begin_layout Standard
46391 This dialog is described in sections
46392 \begin_inset space ~
46396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46398 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
46403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46405 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
46412 \begin_layout Section
46416 \begin_layout Standard
46417 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
46418 \begin_inset space ~
46422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46424 reference "subsec:Margins"
46431 \begin_layout Section
46433 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46435 name "sec:Language-encodings"
46440 \begin_inset Index idx
46443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46444 Language ! Encoding
46452 \begin_layout Standard
46453 The document language and quote styles are set here.
46454 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46455 (the \SpecialChar LyX
46457 is always encoded in utf8).
46458 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
46459 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
46460 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46461 -command is not known for
46462 a particular character).
46463 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
46467 \begin_layout Standard
46469 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
46470 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46471 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
46472 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
46473 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
46474 's default encoding).
46475 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
46476 's Unicode support covers the
46477 characters of most scripts.
46478 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
46479 using one of the traditional, or
46480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46487 , encodings is necessary.
46490 \begin_layout Standard
46492 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
46494 provides support for these traditional encodings.
46497 Traditional (auto-selected)
46503 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
46504 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
46505 the given language(s).
46507 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46511 \begin_layout Standard
46513 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
46514 If you use the option
46519 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
46522 If the document contains text in more than one language you
46523 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
46526 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46529 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
46530 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
46531 exactly one encoding.
46532 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
46537 \begin_layout Standard
46539 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
46540 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
46546 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
46547 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
46551 \begin_layout Standard
46553 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
46554 Finally, you can also select
46558 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
46559 Note that this encoding is then used for
46564 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
46565 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
46569 \begin_layout Standard
46571 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
46574 Do not load inputenc
46576 checkbox does what it states: It prevents \SpecialChar LyX
46577 from automatically loading the
46584 \begin_inset Index idx
46587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46589 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
46591 packages ! inputenc
46599 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
46600 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
46601 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46602 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46603 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46605 Note that this option is only available for the standard
46611 Traditional (auto-selected)
46618 \begin_layout Standard
46620 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
46622 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
46623 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
46624 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46625 installation supports Unicode), choose
46626 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
46627 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46628 is quite incomplete, so
46629 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
46634 (when \SpecialChar LyX
46635 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46636 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
46637 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
46638 -commands is not used, because all
46639 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
46640 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46641 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46642 , two new alternative engines
46643 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
46645 Both engines support Unicode natively.
46647 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
46650 \begin_inset space ~
46658 \begin_inset space ~
46666 \begin_inset space ~
46672 \begin_inset space ~
46676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46678 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
46683 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
46687 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
46692 \begin_layout Standard
46696 \begin_inset space ~
46701 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46702 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
46704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46712 The possible settings are:
46715 \begin_layout Description
46716 Default uses the language package that is selected in
46718 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46719 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46723 \begin_inset space ~
46727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46729 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
46736 \begin_layout Description
46737 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
46738 format you will use.
46739 In many cases this will be
46744 \begin_inset Index idx
46747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46755 If the newer package
46760 \begin_inset Index idx
46763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46765 packages ! polyglossia
46770 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
46771 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
46772 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
46774 this package will be used instead of
46781 \begin_layout Description
46783 \begin_inset space ~
46794 would be more appropriate.
46797 \begin_layout Description
46798 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
46799 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
46803 (for German texts), type in
46806 \begin_inset Newline newline
46811 usepackage{ngerman}
46814 \begin_layout Description
46815 None will not use a language package.
46816 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
46819 \begin_layout Standard
46820 Here is a list with the important encodings:
46823 \begin_layout Description
46825 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
46827 \begin_inset space ~
46831 \begin_inset space ~
46835 \begin_inset space ~
46842 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46848 \begin_inset Index idx
46851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46853 packages ! inputenc
46859 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
46860 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
46861 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
46867 \begin_layout Description
46868 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
46870 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
46871 commands, which may result in a big
46872 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
46873 -commands are needed.
46875 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596221
46876 This is the same as the
46889 \begin_layout Description
46891 \begin_inset space ~
46895 \begin_inset space ~
46898 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
46901 \begin_layout Description
46903 \begin_inset space ~
46907 \begin_inset space ~
46910 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
46913 \begin_layout Description
46915 \begin_inset space ~
46918 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
46921 \begin_layout Description
46923 \begin_inset space ~
46927 \begin_inset space ~
46930 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
46931 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
46934 \begin_layout Description
46936 \begin_inset space ~
46940 \begin_inset space ~
46943 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
46947 \begin_layout Description
46949 \begin_inset space ~
46953 \begin_inset space ~
46956 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
46957 ISO-8859-13 encoding
46960 \begin_layout Description
46962 \begin_inset space ~
46966 \begin_inset space ~
46970 \begin_inset space ~
46973 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
46974 \begin_inset space ~
46980 \begin_layout Description
46982 \begin_inset space ~
46986 \begin_inset space ~
46990 \begin_inset space ~
46993 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
46994 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
46997 \begin_layout Description
46999 \begin_inset space ~
47003 \begin_inset space ~
47006 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
47007 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
47008 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47009 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
47010 \begin_inset space ~
47014 \begin_inset space ~
47020 \begin_layout Description
47022 \begin_inset space ~
47026 \begin_inset space ~
47029 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
47030 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
47031 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47033 should try to use the encoding Unicode
47034 \begin_inset space ~
47038 \begin_inset space ~
47044 \begin_layout Description
47046 \begin_inset space ~
47050 \begin_inset space ~
47053 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
47056 \begin_layout Description
47058 \begin_inset space ~
47062 \begin_inset space ~
47065 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
47068 \begin_layout Description
47070 \begin_inset space ~
47074 \begin_inset space ~
47077 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
47080 \begin_layout Description
47082 \begin_inset space ~
47085 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
47088 \begin_layout Description
47090 \begin_inset space ~
47093 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
47096 \begin_layout Description
47098 \begin_inset space ~
47102 \begin_inset space ~
47105 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
47108 \begin_layout Description
47110 \begin_inset space ~
47114 \begin_inset space ~
47120 \begin_layout Description
47122 \begin_inset space ~
47126 \begin_inset space ~
47129 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
47132 \begin_layout Description
47134 \begin_inset space ~
47138 \begin_inset space ~
47144 \begin_layout Description
47146 \begin_inset space ~
47150 \begin_inset space ~
47153 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47159 \begin_inset Index idx
47162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47169 , when using this, set the document language to
47174 \begin_layout Description
47176 \begin_inset space ~
47180 \begin_inset space ~
47183 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47188 , when using this, set the document language to
47191 \begin_inset space ~
47197 \begin_layout Description
47199 \begin_inset space ~
47203 \begin_inset space ~
47206 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47212 \begin_inset Index idx
47215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47217 packages ! japanese
47222 , when using this, set the document language to
47227 \begin_layout Description
47229 \begin_inset space ~
47233 \begin_inset space ~
47236 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47241 , when using this, set the document language to
47246 \begin_layout Description
47248 \begin_inset space ~
47252 \begin_inset space ~
47255 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47260 , when using this, set the document language to
47265 \begin_layout Description
47267 \begin_inset space ~
47270 (EUC-KR) for Korean
47273 \begin_layout Description
47275 \begin_inset space ~
47279 \begin_inset space ~
47283 \begin_inset space ~
47286 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
47289 \begin_layout Description
47291 \begin_inset space ~
47295 \begin_inset space ~
47299 \begin_inset space ~
47302 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
47303 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
47304 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
47307 \begin_layout Description
47309 \begin_inset space ~
47313 \begin_inset space ~
47319 \begin_layout Description
47321 \begin_inset space ~
47325 \begin_inset space ~
47328 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
47329 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
47332 \begin_layout Description
47334 \begin_inset space ~
47338 \begin_inset space ~
47341 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47347 \begin_inset Index idx
47350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47357 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
47358 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
47360 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47361 with the default encoding (
47363 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47369 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
47370 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47375 \begin_layout Description
47377 \begin_inset space ~
47385 \begin_inset space ~
47388 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
47395 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47398 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47405 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47406 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47408 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47411 \begin_layout Description
47413 \begin_inset space ~
47417 \begin_inset space ~
47420 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47426 \begin_inset Index idx
47429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47437 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
47440 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
47442 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
47443 This used to be more comprehensive than
47446 \begin_inset space ~
47451 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
47456 \begin_layout Description
47458 \begin_inset space ~
47461 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47467 \begin_inset Index idx
47470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47472 packages ! inputenc
47479 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
47480 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
47482 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
47483 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
47484 with the default encoding (
47486 Unicode (utf8) [default]
47492 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
47493 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
47498 \begin_layout Description
47500 \begin_inset space ~
47504 \begin_inset space ~
47508 \begin_inset space ~
47511 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
47512 \begin_inset space ~
47518 \begin_layout Description
47520 \begin_inset space ~
47524 \begin_inset space ~
47528 \begin_inset space ~
47531 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
47532 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
47533 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
47537 \begin_layout Description
47539 \begin_inset space ~
47543 \begin_inset space ~
47547 \begin_inset space ~
47550 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
47551 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
47554 \begin_layout Section
47556 \begin_inset Index idx
47559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47566 \begin_inset Index idx
47569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47576 \begin_inset Index idx
47579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47580 Color ! Shaded boxes
47586 \begin_inset Index idx
47589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47590 Color ! Greyed-out notes
47598 \begin_layout Standard
47599 Here you can alter the font color for the
47603 (default: black), for
47606 \begin_inset space ~
47611 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
47615 (default: white) and for
47618 \begin_inset space ~
47628 sets the color back to the default.
47631 \begin_layout Standard
47632 Clicking any button showing
47640 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
47641 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
47642 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
47643 later more quickly.
47646 \begin_layout Standard
47647 Note, if you change the
47650 \begin_inset space ~
47655 font color and use the option
47658 \begin_inset space ~
47663 in the document settings under
47666 \begin_inset space ~
47671 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
47672 \begin_inset space ~
47676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47678 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
47685 \begin_layout Standard
47686 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
47692 \begin_layout Standard
47696 \begin_inset space ~
47705 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
47708 \begin_inset space ~
47711 Code after a forced page break:
47714 \begin_layout Itemize
47715 For the page color:
47716 \begin_inset Newline newline
47723 pagecolor{color name}
47726 \begin_layout Itemize
47727 For the text color:
47728 \begin_inset Newline newline
47738 \begin_layout Standard
47739 You are restricted to one of
47775 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
47782 \begin_inset space ~
47788 \begin_inset Newline newline
47791 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
47792 names to refer to them:
47795 \begin_layout Itemize
47801 \begin_inset Newline newline
47806 page_backgroundcolor
47809 \begin_layout Itemize
47813 \begin_inset space ~
47819 \begin_inset Newline newline
47827 \begin_layout Itemize
47831 \begin_inset space ~
47837 \begin_inset Newline newline
47845 \begin_layout Itemize
47849 \begin_inset space ~
47855 \begin_inset Newline newline
47863 \begin_layout Standard
47864 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
47867 \begin_inset space ~
47875 \begin_inset space ~
47883 \begin_layout Section
47885 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
47889 \begin_layout Standard
47891 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
47892 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
47893 \begin_inset space ~
47897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47899 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47907 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
47908 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
47911 \begin_layout Standard
47913 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
47914 Additionally, you can advise LyX to place a change bar in the margin of
47916 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
47919 \begin_layout Section
47923 \begin_layout Standard
47924 Here you can adjust the
47928 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
47932 as described in section
47933 \begin_inset space ~
47937 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47939 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
47944 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
47948 \begin_layout Standard
47950 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
47951 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
47953 The functionality is handled by package lineno and and additional options
47954 of this package can be used as well.
47955 The most common one are:
47958 \begin_layout Description
47960 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
47961 right Line numbers to the right margin
47964 \begin_layout Description
47966 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
47967 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
47971 \begin_layout Description
47973 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
47974 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
47977 \begin_layout Description
47979 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
47980 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
47983 \begin_layout Description
47985 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
47986 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
47989 \begin_layout Description
47991 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
47993 \begin_inset space ~
47996 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
48001 \begin_layout Section
48005 \begin_layout Standard
48006 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48012 \begin_inset Index idx
48015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48017 packages ! biblatex
48027 \begin_inset Index idx
48030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48042 \begin_inset Index idx
48045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48053 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
48056 Sectioned bibliography
48058 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48064 \begin_inset Index idx
48067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48069 packages ! bibtopic
48079 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
48080 Finally, you can select a document-specific
48084 for the generation of the bibliography.
48085 For a further description of these possibilities see section
48086 \begin_inset space ~
48090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48092 reference "sec:Bibliography"
48099 \begin_layout Section
48103 \begin_layout Standard
48104 Here you can define the
48108 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
48110 \begin_inset space ~
48114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48116 reference "sec:Index"
48123 \begin_layout Section
48127 \begin_layout Standard
48128 The PDF properties are explained in section
48129 \begin_inset space ~
48133 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48135 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48142 \begin_layout Section
48146 \begin_layout Standard
48147 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
48148 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48154 \begin_inset Index idx
48157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48169 \begin_inset Index idx
48172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48184 \begin_inset Index idx
48187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48199 \begin_inset Index idx
48202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48214 \begin_inset Index idx
48217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48219 packages ! mathdots
48229 \begin_inset Index idx
48232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48234 packages ! mathtools
48244 \begin_inset Index idx
48247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48259 \begin_inset Index idx
48262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48264 packages ! stackrel
48274 \begin_inset Index idx
48277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48279 packages ! stmaryrd
48289 \begin_inset Index idx
48292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48294 packages ! undertilde
48299 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
48302 \begin_layout Description
48303 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48304 -errors in formulas,
48305 ensure that you have this enabled.
48308 \begin_layout Description
48309 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
48310 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
48311 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
48315 \begin_layout Description
48316 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
48319 \begin_inset space ~
48331 \begin_layout Description
48332 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
48335 \begin_inset space ~
48347 \begin_layout Description
48348 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
48359 \begin_layout Description
48360 mathtools is used for the math commands
48396 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
48403 \begin_layout Description
48404 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
48406 Chemical Symbols and Equations
48415 \begin_layout Description
48416 stackrel is used for the math command
48433 \begin_layout Description
48434 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
48437 \begin_layout Description
48438 undertilde is used for the math command
48446 Accents for one Character
48455 \begin_layout Section
48457 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
48459 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
48465 \begin_layout Standard
48467 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
48468 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
48471 \begin_layout Standard
48473 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
48474 The float placement options
48475 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
48478 are described in the section
48481 \begin_inset space ~
48485 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
48487 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
48495 \begin_inset space ~
48503 \begin_layout Section
48507 \begin_layout Standard
48508 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
48510 Program Code Listings
48515 \begin_inset space ~
48523 \begin_layout Section
48527 \begin_layout Standard
48528 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
48536 set to be used and set the
48541 The itemize environment is described in section
48542 \begin_inset space ~
48546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48548 reference "sec:Itemize"
48555 \begin_layout Standard
48556 You can furthermore specify a
48559 \begin_inset space ~
48564 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48565 command of the desired character.
48566 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
48573 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
48575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48579 \begin_inset space \space{}
48583 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
48593 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
48594 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
48597 \begin_layout Standard
48598 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
48601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48606 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
48607 -packages in the preamble (menu
48610 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48611 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48614 \begin_inset space ~
48620 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
48624 usepackage{textcomp}
48627 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
48631 usepackage{amssymb}
48641 \begin_layout Section
48645 \begin_layout Standard
48646 Branches are described in section
48647 \begin_inset space ~
48651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48653 reference "sec:Branches"
48660 \begin_layout Section
48662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48664 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
48671 \begin_layout Standard
48672 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
48675 \begin_layout Description
48677 \begin_inset space ~
48681 \begin_inset space ~
48684 Format: The format that is used when you enter
48685 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48704 View Master Document
48705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48712 Update Master Document
48713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48720 menu or the toolbar.
48721 The default is set in
48723 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48724 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48726 \begin_inset space ~
48729 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
48733 \begin_inset space ~
48737 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48739 reference "sec:File-Formats"
48746 \begin_layout Description
48748 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
48750 \begin_inset space ~
48754 \begin_inset space ~
48758 \begin_inset space ~
48761 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
48766 option which is needed with some packages.
48767 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
48768 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
48771 \begin_layout Description
48773 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
48775 \begin_inset space ~
48779 \begin_inset space ~
48782 Options offers settings for the
48790 \begin_layout Itemize
48794 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
48796 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
48798 \begin_inset space ~
48804 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
48806 \begin_inset space ~
48810 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
48816 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
48818 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
48819 settings for the menu
48821 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
48825 \begin_inset space ~
48829 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
48832 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
48833 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
48838 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48840 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
48842 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
48845 or a detailed description see section
48847 Reverse DVI/PDF search
48852 \begin_inset space ~
48858 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
48862 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
48866 \begin_layout Itemize
48868 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
48871 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
48873 determines whether so-called
48874 \begin_inset Quotes els
48878 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48882 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
48884 \begin_inset Quotes els
48888 \begin_inset Quotes ers
48891 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48892 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
48893 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
48895 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
48897 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
48898 macros, you can uncheck this.
48899 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
48906 \begin_layout Description
48908 \begin_inset space ~
48912 \begin_inset space ~
48915 Options offers settings for the export format
48923 \begin_inset space ~
48928 will assure that the output follows exactly version
48929 \begin_inset space ~
48932 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
48936 \begin_inset space ~
48941 settings are described in detail in section
48943 Math Output in XHTML
48948 \begin_inset space ~
48957 \begin_inset space ~
48961 \begin_inset space ~
48966 is used for the size of equations in the output.
48969 \begin_layout Description
48971 \begin_inset space ~
48976 Save transient properties
48978 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
48979 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
48980 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
48984 \begin_layout Itemize
48985 the activation of change tracking
48988 \begin_layout Itemize
48989 the output of tracked changes
48992 \begin_layout Itemize
48993 the recording of the document directory path.
48996 \begin_layout Standard
48997 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
48998 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
49002 \begin_layout Section
49010 \begin_layout Standard
49011 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49013 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
49015 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
49017 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
49021 \begin_layout Standard
49022 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49023 -syntax is given in section
49024 \begin_inset space ~
49028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49030 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
49037 \begin_layout Chapter
49043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49045 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
49050 \begin_inset Index idx
49053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49062 \begin_layout Standard
49063 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
49065 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49069 It has the following submenus.
49072 \begin_layout Section
49076 \begin_layout Subsection
49080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49081 User Interface File
49082 \begin_inset Index idx
49085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49086 Customization ! of toolbars
49092 \begin_inset Index idx
49095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49096 Customization ! of menus
49104 \begin_layout Standard
49105 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
49106 interface (ui) file.
49107 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
49115 \begin_layout Description
49120 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
49123 \begin_layout Description
49130 the menu entries in popup context menus
49133 \begin_layout Description
49138 specifies the toolbar buttons
49141 \begin_layout Standard
49142 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
49143 and edit the entries.
49146 \begin_layout Standard
49147 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
49159 entries must be finished with an explicit
49184 and in the case of the
49185 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49189 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49197 The syntax for the entries is:
49200 \begin_layout Standard
49201 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49230 \begin_layout Standard
49232 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49235 All the \SpecialChar LyX
49236 -functions are listed in the menu
49238 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49240 \begin_inset space ~
49248 \begin_layout Standard
49249 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
49255 \begin_layout Standard
49256 For example, assuming you use the menu
49258 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49261 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
49265 \begin_layout Standard
49266 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49280 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49290 \begin_layout Standard
49292 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
49296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49307 to have the sixth bookmark.
49310 \begin_layout Standard
49314 \begin_inset space ~
49319 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
49320 's toolbar buttons.
49321 The currently available icon sets are compared in
49322 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49325 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
49333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49337 \begin_layout Standard
49340 Enable tool tips in main work area
49342 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
49346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49350 \begin_layout Standard
49355 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
49356 should display in the menu
49358 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
49360 \begin_inset space ~
49368 \begin_layout Subsection
49372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49376 \begin_layout Standard
49379 Restore window layouts and geometries
49382 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
49383 the last \SpecialChar LyX
49387 \begin_layout Standard
49390 Restore cursor positions
49392 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
49396 \begin_layout Standard
49399 Load opened files from last session
49401 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
49405 \begin_layout Standard
49408 Clear all session information
49410 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
49411 sessions (cursor positions, names
49412 of last opened documents, etc.).
49415 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49417 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49419 name "subsec:Backup documents"
49424 \begin_inset Index idx
49427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49436 \begin_layout Standard
49439 Backup original documents when saving
49441 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
49442 it was saved the last time.
49443 It is stored in the
49446 \begin_inset space ~
49452 \begin_inset space ~
49456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49458 reference "sec:Paths"
49462 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
49465 \begin_inset space ~
49471 The backup file has the file extension
49472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49486 \begin_layout Standard
49489 Backup documents, every
49491 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
49494 \begin_layout Standard
49497 Save documents compressed by default
49499 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
49500 \begin_inset space ~
49504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49506 reference "subsec:Compressed"
49511 This applies to newly created documents only.
49512 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
49515 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49516 Windows & work area
49519 \begin_layout Standard
49522 Open documents in tabs
49524 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
49528 \begin_layout Standard
49533 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
49538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49540 \begin_inset space ~
49544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49546 reference "sec:Paths"
49550 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
49557 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
49558 documents will be opened in the same running instance
49559 of \SpecialChar LyX
49561 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
49562 instance is created for each file.
49565 \begin_layout Standard
49568 Single close-tab button
49570 is checked, there will only be one close button (
49580 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
49581 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
49582 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
49586 \begin_layout Standard
49587 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49595 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
49596 before the change takes effect.
49604 \begin_layout Standard
49609 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
49611 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
49613 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
49617 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
49618 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
49619 and only want to close the view in once instance.
49622 \begin_layout Subsection
49624 \begin_inset Index idx
49627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49636 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49643 \begin_layout Standard
49644 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
49648 \begin_layout Standard
49649 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49657 This section only deals with the fonts
49661 the \SpecialChar LyX
49663 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
49666 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49667 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49678 \begin_layout Standard
49679 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
49696 (depends on the system) as its
49699 \begin_inset space ~
49715 \begin_layout Standard
49716 You can change the font size with the
49723 \begin_layout Standard
49728 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
49730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49733 points have the size of 1
49734 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49738 \begin_inset space ~
49742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49744 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
49749 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
49750 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49754 The sizes are explained in detail in section
49755 \begin_inset space ~
49759 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49761 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
49768 \begin_layout Subsection
49770 \begin_inset Index idx
49773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49774 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
49781 \begin_inset Index idx
49784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49793 \begin_layout Standard
49794 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
49795 by choosing an item in the
49796 list and selecting the
49803 \begin_layout Standard
49804 By checking the option
49808 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
49811 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
49812 \begin_inset space ~
49816 \begin_inset space ~
49821 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
49824 \begin_layout Subsection
49826 \begin_inset Index idx
49829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49838 \begin_layout Standard
49839 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
49843 \begin_layout Standard
49848 enables previewing snippets of your document.
49849 This feature is described in section
49850 \begin_inset space ~
49854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49856 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
49863 \begin_layout Standard
49864 Checking the option
49867 \begin_inset space ~
49871 \begin_inset space ~
49875 \begin_inset space ~
49880 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
49883 \begin_layout Section
49885 \begin_inset Index idx
49888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49897 \begin_layout Subsection
49901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
49905 \begin_layout Standard
49908 Cursor follows scrollbar
49910 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
49914 \begin_layout Standard
49915 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
49916 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
49917 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
49920 \begin_layout Standard
49923 Scroll below end of document
49925 is self-explanatory.
49928 \begin_layout Standard
49929 In \SpecialChar LyX
49930 one can jump from word to word by pressing
49937 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
49939 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
49940 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
49941 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
49945 \begin_layout Standard
49947 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924785
49950 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
49952 is for users who don't want tracked changes to be dissolved on copy and
49953 paste operations (i.
49954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49957 e., inserted as new text with the deletions removed).
49958 If this is checked, the change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as
49959 is, independent if changes are currently tracked or not.
49960 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
49961 dissolving from insets.
49966 \begin_layout Standard
49969 Sort environments alphabetically
49971 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49974 \begin_layout Standard
49977 Group environments by their category
49979 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
49982 \begin_layout Standard
49987 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
49996 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
50000 \begin_layout Standard
50002 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
50005 Search drive for cited files
50007 allows \SpecialChar LyX
50008 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
50011 \begin_inset space ~
50015 \begin_inset space ~
50019 \begin_inset space ~
50023 \begin_inset space ~
50026 Content\SpecialChar ldots
50029 context menu on a citation.
50034 field determines the search pattern.
50036 \begin_inset space ~
50040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50042 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
50051 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50055 \begin_layout Standard
50056 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
50061 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
50062 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
50066 \begin_layout Subsection
50068 \begin_inset Index idx
50071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50078 \begin_inset Index idx
50081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50082 Settings ! Shortcuts
50090 \begin_layout Standard
50095 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
50097 Several binding files are available, among them:
50100 \begin_layout Description
50101 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
50104 \begin_layout Description
50105 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
50117 \begin_layout Description
50118 mac.bind a set of bindings for
50121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50129 \begin_layout Standard
50130 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
50135 , and binding files for special languages.
50136 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
50137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50141 \begin_inset space \space{}
50145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50153 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
50154 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
50155 will try to use the appropriate binding
50159 \begin_layout Standard
50160 Some binding files, like
50164 , only have a limited scope.
50165 When looking at the end of the file
50169 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
50172 \begin_layout Standard
50176 \begin_inset space ~
50180 \begin_inset space ~
50185 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
50186 in the selected key binding file.
50189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50191 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50193 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
50198 \begin_inset Index idx
50201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50202 Key Bindings ! Editing
50210 \begin_layout Standard
50211 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
50212 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
50213 functions and the bound shortcuts.
50214 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
50217 Show key-bindings containing
50220 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
50221 Insert there for example as keyword
50222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50229 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
50230 functions that contain
50231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50239 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
50240 All \SpecialChar LyX
50241 functions are also listed in the file
50246 that you will find in the
50253 \begin_layout Standard
50254 For example, to add the shortcut
50262 , select the function and press the
50267 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
50268 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
50271 \begin_layout Standard
50272 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
50273 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
50278 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
50280 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
50285 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
50288 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
50292 \begin_layout Standard
50293 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
50296 \begin_layout Standard
50297 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
50299 The syntax of the entries is:
50302 \begin_layout Standard
50308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50327 \begin_layout Standard
50328 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
50329 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
50330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50357 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
50358 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
50359 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
50360 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
50362 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
50366 , you needed to specify it as
50371 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
50374 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
50377 \begin_layout Subsection
50379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50381 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
50386 \begin_inset Index idx
50389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50396 \begin_inset Index idx
50399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50400 Settings ! Keyboard Map
50408 \begin_layout Standard
50409 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
50410 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
50411 provides keyboard maps.
50412 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
50413 is a Romanian one, you can enable
50416 \begin_inset space ~
50420 \begin_inset space ~
50425 and select the keyboard map file named
50432 \begin_layout Standard
50441 keyboard map and, if you use the
50445 bindings, you can select the first and second with
50448 arg "keymap-primary"
50454 arg "keymap-secondary"
50457 respectively or toggle between them with
50460 arg "keymap-toggle"
50466 \begin_layout Standard
50467 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50475 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
50484 \begin_layout Standard
50485 You can also specify the mouse
50487 Wheel scrolling speed
50490 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
50494 Middle mouse button pasting
50496 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
50497 inserts the content of the clipboard.
50500 \begin_layout Standard
50508 \begin_inset space ~
50512 \begin_inset space ~
50517 you can select a key for zooming.
50518 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
50521 \begin_layout Subsection
50525 \begin_layout Standard
50526 Input completion is described in section
50527 \begin_inset space ~
50531 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50533 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
50540 \begin_layout Section
50542 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50549 \begin_inset Index idx
50552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50559 \begin_inset Index idx
50562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50571 \begin_layout Standard
50572 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
50573 are normally determined during
50575 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
50578 \begin_layout Description
50580 \begin_inset space ~
50583 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
50584 's working directory.
50585 It is the default when you
50596 \begin_inset space ~
50604 \begin_layout Description
50606 \begin_inset space ~
50609 templates This directory
50610 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
50611 contains the templates that are shown
50612 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
50613 will be opened when you use the menu
50614 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
50619 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50621 \begin_inset space ~
50625 \begin_inset space ~
50633 \begin_layout Description
50635 \begin_inset space ~
50638 files This directory
50639 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
50640 will be opened when you use the
50641 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
50642 contains the example files that are listed in
50645 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
50654 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50656 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
50658 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
50664 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
50666 \begin_inset Newline newline
50670 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50682 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
50683 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
50693 \begin_layout Description
50695 \begin_inset space ~
50699 \begin_inset Index idx
50702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50708 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
50709 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
50710 \begin_inset space ~
50714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50716 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50724 will be used to save the backups.
50725 \begin_inset Newline newline
50728 Backup files have the ending
50729 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50739 \begin_layout Description
50741 \begin_inset space ~
50744 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
50745 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
50747 \begin_inset Newline newline
50754 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50760 You can edit this file with the program
50769 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
50770 in its preferences under
50773 \begin_inset space ~
50779 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
50784 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
50786 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
50787 in your \SpecialChar LyX
50793 and \SpecialChar LyX
50794 need to be running the same time.
50795 \begin_inset Newline newline
50798 The pipe is also used for the
50802 feature, see section
50803 \begin_inset space ~
50807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50809 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
50814 \begin_inset Newline newline
50817 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
50818 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
50819 \begin_inset Newline newline
50835 \begin_layout Description
50837 \begin_inset space ~
50840 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
50843 \begin_layout Description
50845 \begin_inset space ~
50848 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
50849 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
50850 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
50853 \begin_layout Description
50855 \begin_inset space ~
50858 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
50864 You only need to specify it if you are using
50868 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
50870 For \SpecialChar LyX
50875 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
50879 \begin_layout Description
50881 \begin_inset space ~
50884 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
50885 When \SpecialChar LyX
50886 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
50887 to find it on the system.
50888 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
50890 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
50892 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50899 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
50900 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
50903 \begin_layout Description
50905 \begin_inset space ~
50908 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
50909 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
50910 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
50911 code or in the document
50913 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
50915 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
50916 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
50917 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
50918 scanned for the input files.
50919 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
50920 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
50922 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
50923 compilation may fail for some documents.
50926 \begin_layout Section
50930 \begin_layout Standard
50931 Here you can insert your
50940 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
50942 \begin_inset space ~
50946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50948 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50952 , to mark changes you make as yours.
50955 \begin_layout Section
50957 \begin_inset Index idx
50960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50961 Language ! Settings
50967 \begin_inset Index idx
50970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50971 Settings ! Language
50979 \begin_layout Subsection
50981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50983 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
50990 \begin_layout Description
50992 \begin_inset space ~
50996 \begin_inset space ~
50999 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
51001 You can find its actual translation status here:
51002 \begin_inset CommandInset href
51004 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
51010 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
51014 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51016 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
51017 LaTeX Language Support
51022 \begin_layout Description
51024 \begin_inset space ~
51027 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
51028 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
51029 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
51030 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
51031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51047 The most widespread language package is
51052 \begin_inset Index idx
51055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51062 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
51064 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
51065 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
51066 come with the alternative
51072 \begin_inset Index idx
51075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51077 packages ! polyglossia
51082 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
51083 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
51089 The available selections are described in section
51090 \begin_inset space ~
51094 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51096 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
51103 \begin_layout Description
51105 \begin_inset space ~
51109 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
51110 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
51111 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
51113 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
51117 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
51121 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
51123 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
51127 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
51128 that is used to switch to a different language
51129 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
51130 to start the package
51134 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
51135 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
51139 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
51140 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
51143 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51147 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51155 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
51163 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
51166 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
51168 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
51172 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
51190 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51191 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51198 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
51199 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51204 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
51209 , this setting is ignored.
51214 \begin_layout Description
51216 \begin_inset space ~
51220 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
51227 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
51228 Use this if the language switch set in
51232 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
51236 's alternative command
51240 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
51241 \SpecialChar allowbreak
51244 end{otherlanguage*}
51248 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
51249 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
51250 command toggles the package on and off
51251 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
51252 Empty by default, as
51256 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51258 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
51263 selectlanguage{$$lang}
51269 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
51274 , this setting is ignored.
51279 \begin_layout Description
51281 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51283 \begin_inset space ~
51287 \begin_inset space ~
51290 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
51294 \begin_layout Description
51296 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
51298 \begin_inset space ~
51302 \begin_inset space ~
51305 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51311 \begin_layout Description
51313 \begin_inset space ~
51317 \begin_inset space ~
51321 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
51323 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
51326 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
51327 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
51330 to the document class options
51331 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
51332 rather than the language package options.
51333 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
51337 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
51338 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
51340 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
51341 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
51343 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
51348 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
51349 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
51358 \begin_layout Description
51360 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
51362 \begin_inset space ~
51366 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
51368 \begin_inset space ~
51372 \begin_inset space ~
51376 \begin_inset space ~
51382 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
51384 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
51387 this option is set,
51388 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
51389 the language switch defined in
51392 \begin_inset space ~
51397 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
51398 to the document language.
51399 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
51400 This might be needed if you use a non-default
51403 \begin_inset space ~
51408 or if a package resets the document language.
51409 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
51410 usually should be the document language).
51411 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
51412 documents start with the chosen document language.
51413 When this option is not set, the
51416 \begin_inset space ~
51421 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51423 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
51426 \begin_inset space ~
51436 \begin_layout Description
51438 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
51440 \begin_inset space ~
51444 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
51446 \begin_inset space ~
51450 \begin_inset space ~
51454 \begin_inset space ~
51460 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
51464 \begin_inset space ~
51468 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
51469 Set document language explicitly
51475 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
51477 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
51483 \begin_inset space ~
51489 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
51491 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
51495 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
51497 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
51500 the end of the document.
51501 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
51505 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51506 \paragraph_spacing single
51508 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
51514 \begin_layout Description
51516 \begin_inset space ~
51520 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
51522 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
51526 \begin_inset space ~
51530 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
51532 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
51534 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
51538 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
51541 in a language different
51542 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
51544 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
51547 the document language will be
51548 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
51549 marked (by default with a blue
51552 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
51554 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
51558 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
51562 \begin_layout Description
51564 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
51566 \begin_inset space ~
51570 \begin_inset space ~
51574 \begin_inset space ~
51577 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
51578 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
51579 switched via the operating system.
51580 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
51582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51585 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
51586 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
51591 \begin_layout Description
51593 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
51595 \begin_inset space ~
51599 \begin_inset space ~
51602 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
51603 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
51608 \begin_layout Description
51610 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51612 \begin_inset space ~
51616 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
51618 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
51622 \begin_inset space ~
51626 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
51627 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
51628 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
51630 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
51634 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
51636 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
51637 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
51639 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51640 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
51641 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
51643 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
51648 \begin_layout Standard
51653 means that the cursor
51654 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
51655 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
51656 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
51658 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51661 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
51662 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
51666 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
51668 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
51669 specific case always means: move
51673 in text (even if this means:
51679 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51680 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
51681 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
51682 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
51683 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
51684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51695 \begin_layout Standard
51697 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
51702 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
51703 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
51704 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
51708 ) when coming from the left.
51709 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
51711 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
51712 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
51713 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
51718 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51720 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
51724 \begin_layout Description
51726 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
51728 \begin_inset space ~
51732 \begin_inset space ~
51735 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
51736 separator alignment).
51737 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
51739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51742 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
51743 (static) custom character here.
51746 \begin_layout Description
51748 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
51750 \begin_inset space ~
51754 \begin_inset space ~
51757 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
51763 \begin_layout Subsection
51767 \begin_layout Standard
51768 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
51769 \begin_inset space ~
51773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51775 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51782 \begin_layout Section
51786 \begin_layout Subsection
51788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51790 name "subsec:General-output"
51797 \begin_layout Description
51799 \begin_inset space ~
51802 search Commands that will be used for the menu
51804 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
51806 \begin_inset space ~
51812 For a detailed description see section
51814 Reverse DVI/PDF search
51819 \begin_inset space ~
51827 \begin_layout Description
51829 \begin_inset space ~
51832 Options Options for the program
51836 that is used for the export format
51841 \begin_inset space ~
51845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51847 reference "subsec:Export"
51852 Possible options are listed in the
51857 \begin_inset Newline newline
51861 \begin_inset Flex URL
51864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51866 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
51876 \begin_layout Description
51878 \begin_inset space ~
51882 \begin_inset space ~
51885 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
51888 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51889 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
51891 \begin_inset space ~
51897 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
51900 \begin_layout Description
51902 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
51904 \begin_inset space ~
51908 \begin_inset Index idx
51911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51918 \begin_inset Index idx
51921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51922 Settings ! Date format
51927 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
51928 \begin_inset Newline newline
51932 \begin_inset Flex URL
51935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51937 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
51943 \begin_inset Newline newline
51946 For example the format
51947 \begin_inset Newline newline
51951 \begin_inset Newline newline
51954 prints the date as day/month/year.
51959 \begin_layout Description
51961 \begin_inset space ~
51965 \begin_inset space ~
51968 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
51969 is allowed to overwrite on export.
51972 \begin_layout Subsection
51978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51980 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
51985 \begin_inset Index idx
51988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51989 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
51998 \begin_layout Description
52000 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
52002 \begin_inset space ~
52010 \begin_inset space ~
52014 \begin_inset space ~
52017 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
52022 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
52043 are used for Cyrillic.
52044 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
52045 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52057 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
52059 sets up in the background.
52060 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
52065 \begin_layout Description
52067 \begin_inset space ~
52071 \begin_inset space ~
52075 \begin_inset space ~
52079 \begin_inset space ~
52082 options They only have an effect when the program
52086 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
52089 \begin_layout Standard
52090 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
52091 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
52092 manuals of the applications.
52095 \begin_layout Description
52097 \begin_inset space ~
52100 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
52101 \begin_inset space ~
52105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52107 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
52114 \begin_layout Description
52116 \begin_inset space ~
52119 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
52120 \begin_inset space ~
52124 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52126 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
52133 \begin_layout Description
52135 \begin_inset space ~
52138 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
52139 \begin_inset space ~
52143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52145 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
52152 \begin_layout Description
52158 \begin_inset space ~
52161 command Command for the program
52163 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52166 that is described in the section
52168 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52173 Additional Features
52178 \begin_layout Standard
52179 There are additionally the following options:
52182 \begin_layout Description
52184 \begin_inset space ~
52188 \begin_inset space ~
52192 \begin_inset space ~
52196 \begin_inset space ~
52201 \begin_inset space ~
52204 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
52205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52222 to separate folders.
52223 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
52225 \begin_inset Index idx
52228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52235 \begin_inset Index idx
52238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52247 \begin_layout Description
52249 \begin_inset space ~
52253 \begin_inset space ~
52257 \begin_inset space ~
52261 \begin_inset space ~
52265 \begin_inset space ~
52269 \begin_inset space ~
52272 changes Removes all manually set
52278 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
52279 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
52281 \begin_inset space ~
52286 dialog when changing the document class.
52289 \begin_layout Section
52291 \begin_inset space ~
52295 \begin_inset Index idx
52298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52307 \begin_layout Subsection
52309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52311 name "subsec:Converters"
52316 \begin_inset Index idx
52319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52328 \begin_layout Standard
52329 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
52330 from one format to another.
52331 You can modify converters or create new ones.
52332 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
52339 \begin_inset space ~
52344 field and press the
52349 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
52353 \begin_inset space ~
52358 drop-down list, modify the
52362 field and press the
52369 \begin_layout Standard
52372 Converter File Cache
52378 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
52380 Maximum Age (in days
52383 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
52384 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
52387 \begin_layout Standard
52388 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
52389 definition, is described in the section
52400 \begin_layout Subsection
52402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52404 name "sec:File-Formats"
52409 \begin_inset Index idx
52412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52419 \begin_inset Index idx
52422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52431 \begin_layout Standard
52432 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
52442 programs that should be used for certain formats.
52445 \begin_layout Standard
52446 You can also define the
52448 Default output format
52450 that is used when you use
52452 View, Update, View Master Document
52456 Update Master Document
52462 menu or the toolbar.
52465 \begin_layout Standard
52466 More about formats and their options is described in the section
52477 \begin_layout Standard
52478 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
52480 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
52481 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
52482 This is done by specifying a
52487 More about this is described in the section
52498 \begin_layout Chapter
52499 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52501 \begin_inset Index idx
52504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52511 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52513 name "chap:Units-available-in"
52520 \begin_layout Standard
52522 \begin_inset space ~
52526 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52528 reference "tab:Units"
52532 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
52533 and used in this documentation.
52536 \begin_layout Standard
52537 \begin_inset Float table
52544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52545 \begin_inset Caption Standard
52547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52563 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
52569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52571 \begin_inset Tabular
52572 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
52573 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
52574 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52575 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
52576 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52578 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52622 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52659 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52700 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52729 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
52733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52890 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52894 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52927 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
52979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
52999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53000 scaled point (65536
53001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53068 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
53073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53192 % of original image width
53197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53281 \begin_layout Standard
53282 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
53285 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
53292 \begin_layout Bibliography
53293 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53294 LatexCommand bibitem
53301 The \SpecialChar LyX
53303 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53306 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
53312 \begin_inset Newline newline
53316 \begin_inset Flex URL
53319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53321 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
53329 \begin_layout Bibliography
53330 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53331 LatexCommand bibitem
53332 key "latexcompanion"
53337 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
53339 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53340 Companion Second Edition.
53343 Addison-Wesley, 2004
53346 \begin_layout Bibliography
53347 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53348 LatexCommand bibitem
53354 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
53357 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
53361 Addison-Wesley, 2003
53364 \begin_layout Bibliography
53365 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53366 LatexCommand bibitem
53375 : A Document Preparation System.
53378 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
53381 \begin_layout Bibliography
53382 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53383 LatexCommand bibitem
53393 The \SpecialChar TeX
53397 Addison-Wesley, 1984
53400 \begin_layout Bibliography
53401 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53402 LatexCommand bibitem
53408 The \SpecialChar TeX
53410 \begin_inset Newline newline
53414 \begin_inset Flex URL
53417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53419 https://ctan.org/topic
53427 \begin_layout Bibliography
53428 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53429 LatexCommand bibitem
53435 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
53437 \begin_inset Newline newline
53441 \begin_inset Flex URL
53444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53446 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
53454 \begin_layout Bibliography
53455 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53456 LatexCommand bibitem
53463 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53465 name "Documentation"
53466 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
53473 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53477 \begin_inset Newline newline
53481 \begin_inset Flex URL
53484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53486 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
53494 \begin_layout Bibliography
53495 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53496 LatexCommand bibitem
53503 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53505 name "Documentation"
53506 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
53511 how to use the program
53513 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
53517 \begin_inset Newline newline
53521 \begin_inset Flex URL
53524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53526 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
53534 \begin_layout Bibliography
53535 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53536 LatexCommand bibitem
53543 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53545 name "Documentation"
53546 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
53551 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53557 \begin_inset Index idx
53560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53562 packages ! biblatex
53568 \begin_inset Newline newline
53572 \begin_inset Flex URL
53575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53577 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
53585 \begin_layout Bibliography
53586 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53587 LatexCommand bibitem
53594 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53596 name "Documentation"
53597 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
53602 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53608 \begin_inset Index idx
53611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53619 \begin_inset Newline newline
53623 \begin_inset Flex URL
53626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53628 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
53636 \begin_layout Bibliography
53637 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53638 LatexCommand bibitem
53645 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53647 name "Documentation"
53648 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
53658 \begin_inset Newline newline
53662 \begin_inset Flex URL
53665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53667 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
53675 \begin_layout Bibliography
53676 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53677 LatexCommand bibitem
53678 key "makeindex-man"
53684 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53687 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
53697 \begin_inset Newline newline
53701 \begin_inset Flex URL
53704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53706 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
53714 \begin_layout Bibliography
53715 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53716 LatexCommand bibitem
53723 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53725 name "Documentation"
53726 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
53736 \begin_inset Newline newline
53740 \begin_inset Flex URL
53743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53745 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
53753 \begin_layout Bibliography
53754 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53755 LatexCommand bibitem
53762 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53764 name "Documentation"
53765 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
53770 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
53772 \begin_inset Newline newline
53776 \begin_inset Flex URL
53779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53781 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
53789 \begin_layout Bibliography
53790 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53791 LatexCommand bibitem
53798 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53800 name "Documentation"
53801 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
53806 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53812 \begin_inset Index idx
53815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53823 \begin_inset Newline newline
53827 \begin_inset Flex URL
53830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53832 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
53840 \begin_layout Bibliography
53841 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53842 LatexCommand bibitem
53849 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53851 name "Documentation"
53852 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
53857 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53863 \begin_inset Index idx
53866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53868 packages ! enumitem
53874 \begin_inset Newline newline
53878 \begin_inset Flex URL
53881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53883 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
53891 \begin_layout Bibliography
53892 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53893 LatexCommand bibitem
53900 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53902 name "Documentation"
53903 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
53908 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53914 \begin_inset Index idx
53917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53919 packages ! fancyhdr
53925 \begin_inset Newline newline
53929 \begin_inset Flex URL
53932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53934 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
53942 \begin_layout Bibliography
53943 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53944 LatexCommand bibitem
53951 \begin_inset CommandInset href
53953 name "Documentation"
53954 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
53959 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
53965 \begin_inset Index idx
53968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53970 packages ! hyperref
53976 \begin_inset Newline newline
53980 \begin_inset Flex URL
53983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53985 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
53993 \begin_layout Bibliography
53994 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
53995 LatexCommand bibitem
54002 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54004 name "Documentation"
54005 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
54010 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54016 \begin_inset Index idx
54019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54021 packages ! microtype
54027 \begin_inset Newline newline
54031 \begin_inset Flex URL
54034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54036 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
54044 \begin_layout Bibliography
54045 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54046 LatexCommand bibitem
54053 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54055 name "Documentation"
54056 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
54061 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54067 \begin_inset Index idx
54070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54078 \begin_inset Newline newline
54082 \begin_inset Flex URL
54085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54087 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
54095 \begin_layout Bibliography
54096 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54097 LatexCommand bibitem
54104 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54106 name "Documentation"
54107 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
54112 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54118 \begin_inset Index idx
54121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54123 packages ! prettyref
54129 \begin_inset Newline newline
54133 \begin_inset Flex URL
54136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54138 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
54146 \begin_layout Bibliography
54147 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54148 LatexCommand bibitem
54155 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54157 name "Documentation"
54158 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
54163 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54169 \begin_inset Index idx
54172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54174 packages ! refstyle
54180 \begin_inset Newline newline
54184 \begin_inset Flex URL
54187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54189 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
54197 \begin_layout Bibliography
54198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54199 LatexCommand bibitem
54206 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54209 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
54214 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54216 \begin_inset Newline newline
54220 \begin_inset Flex URL
54223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54225 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
54233 \begin_layout Bibliography
54234 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54235 LatexCommand bibitem
54242 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54245 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
54250 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54252 \begin_inset Newline newline
54256 \begin_inset Flex URL
54259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54261 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
54269 \begin_layout Bibliography
54270 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54271 LatexCommand bibitem
54278 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54281 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
54286 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54287 for Cyrillic languages:
54288 \begin_inset Newline newline
54292 \begin_inset Flex URL
54295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54297 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
54305 \begin_layout Bibliography
54306 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54307 LatexCommand bibitem
54314 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54317 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
54322 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54324 \begin_inset Newline newline
54328 \begin_inset Flex URL
54331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54333 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
54341 \begin_layout Bibliography
54342 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54343 LatexCommand bibitem
54350 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54353 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
54358 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54360 \begin_inset Newline newline
54364 \begin_inset Flex URL
54367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54369 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
54377 \begin_layout Bibliography
54378 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54379 LatexCommand bibitem
54386 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54389 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
54394 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
54396 \begin_inset Newline newline
54400 \begin_inset Flex URL
54403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54405 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
54413 \begin_layout Standard
54414 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54448 \begin_inset Note Note
54451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54458 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
54459 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
54460 bibliography is the second one:
54468 \begin_layout Standard
54469 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
54470 LatexCommand bibtex
54471 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
54472 options "biblio/alphadin"
54479 \begin_layout Standard
54480 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54484 \begin_layout Standard
54488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54494 pagedeclaration}[1]{
54497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54503 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
54511 \begin_inset Note Note
54514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54515 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
54516 \begin_inset space ~
54520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54522 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
54534 \begin_layout Standard
54535 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
54536 LatexCommand printnomenclature
54542 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
54543 LatexCommand printindex